Toshiba 15Lv505 Service Manual 51T 01P COVER.p65

15LV505 15LV505

2014-12-13

: Toshiba Toshiba-15Lv505-Service-Manual-131950 toshiba-15lv505-service-manual-131950 toshiba pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 100

SERVICE MANUAL

15-inch Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, August, 2008 GREEN

FILE NO. 810-200882GR

The above model is classified as a green product (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial number.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green product. When repairing this green

product, use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

15LV505

(*1) GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling

and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of

certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any

marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation

recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to

enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this,

Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products,

parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in

manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

(*2) LEAD-FREE SOLDER

This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer

products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in

the servicing and repair of this product.

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

The melting temperature of lead-free solder is higher than that of leaded solder by 86°F to 104°F

(30°C to 40°C). Use of a soldering iron designed for lead-based solders to repair product made

with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great

care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product  especially

when soldering large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs  as the level of heat

required to melt lead-free solder is high.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

LEAD-FREE SOLDER

TABLE OF CONTENTS

• OWNER'S MANUAL

CAUTION .....................................................................................................................................

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING ....................................................................................

HOW TO ORDER PARTS ..........................................................................................................

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS.....................................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................

PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ................................................................................

REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE ..............................................................................................

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1.REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS.............................................

2.REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS .....................................................................................

3.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC................................................

SERVICE MODE LIST .................................................................................................................

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS.......................................................................................

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC .........................................................................

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS..................................................................................................

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .....................................................................................................

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD ...........................................................................................................................................

POWER .....................................................................................................................................

POWER(DIGITAL PCB) ..........................................................................................................

SIGNAL .....................................................................................................................................

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT.....................................................................................................................................

DIGITAL ....................................................................................................................................

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON/SW .................................................................................

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON .........................................................................................

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP .................................................................................................

MEMORY...................................................................................................................................

MOTOR DRIVE .........................................................................................................................

AUDIO/VIDEO ..........................................................................................................................

MICON.......................................................................................................................................

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO ..........................................................................................................

TUNER ......................................................................................................................................

HDMI..........................................................................................................................................

LVDS..........................................................................................................................................

SCALER POWER .....................................................................................................................

FLASH .......................................................................................................................................

DDR ...........................................................................................................................................

JACK..........................................................................................................................................

AV SWITCH ..............................................................................................................................

REGULATOR ...........................................................................................................................

POWER .....................................................................................................................................

BACKLIGHT INVERTER .........................................................................................................

SOUND AMP ............................................................................................................................

JACK OUT ................................................................................................................................

SW .............................................................................................................................................

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................

WAVEFORMS ...............................................................................................................................

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW ..............................................................................................

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST...........................................................................

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..............................................................................

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ............................................................................

A1-1

A1-2

A1-3~A1-5

A1-6

A1-7

A1-8

A2-1~A2-8

B1-1, B1-2

B2-1, B2-2

B3-1, B3-2

C-1

C-2

C-3

D-1~D-5

E-1~E-9

F-1, F-2

F-3, F-4

F-5, F-6

F-7, F-8

G-1, G-2

G-3, G-4

G-5, G-6

G-7, G-8

H-1, H-2

H-3, H-4

H-5, H-6

H-7, H-8

H-9, H-10

H-11, H-12

H-13, H-14

H-15, H-16

H-17, H-18

H-19, H-20

H-21, H-22

H-23, H-24

H-25, H-26

H-27, H-28

H-29, H-30

H-31, H-32

H-33, H-34

H-35, H-36

H-37, H-38

H-39, H-40

H-41, H-42

I-1, I-2

J1-1~J1-3

J2-1

K1-1

K2-1

K3-1~K3-4

•

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company

is authorized to change, modify, or extend

the terms of these warranties in any manner

whatsoever. The time within which an action must

be commenced to enforce any obligation of TACP

arising under the warranty or under any statute

or law of the United States or any state thereof is

hereby limited to ninety (90) days from the date

you discover, or should have discovered, the

defect. This limitation does not apply to implied

warranties arising under state law.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL

RIGHTS AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER

RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO

STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE

U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW

LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, WHEN

AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE

ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU

UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If, after following all of the operating instructions

in this manual and checking the section

“Troubleshooting,” you ﬁ nd that service is needed:

(1) For instructions on how to obtain warranty

service for your LCD TV/DVD Combination,

contact TACP·s Consumer Solution Center toll

free at 1-800-631-3811.

(2) You must include a copy or original bill of

sale or other proof of purchase along with

the entire LCD TV/DVD Combination to the

Depot Warranty Repair Center speciﬁ ed by

the TACP Consumer Solutions Center. You

are responsible for all inbound transportation

and insurance charges for the LCD TV/DVD

Combination to the Depot Warranty Repair

Center speciﬁ ed by the TACP Consumer

Solutions Center.

For additional information, visit TACP·s website:

www.tacp.toshiba.com

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF

ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION

OF THE LIMITED WARRANTIES SET FORTH

ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY

STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS HEREBY LIMITED,

THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE

AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR

OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO

THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY

PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL TACP BE LIABLE

FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR

MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED

DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY

TO USE THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION).

Printed in Thailand

ColorStream is registered trademark of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

J51T0101A SH 08/08 N

15LV505

OWNER’S MANUAL

Introduction

Connections

Basic setup

Basic playback

Advanced playback

Function setup

Others

TV operation

Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly.

15-inch* Diagonal LCD TV/DVD

COMBINATION

*Screen size is approximate.

Owner·s Record

The model number and serial number

are on the back of your TV/DVD.

Record these numbers in the spaces

below. Refer to these numbers

whenever you communicate with your

Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.

Model number:

Serial number:

Dear Customer,

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba LCD TV or TV/DVD

Combination television.

This manual will help you use the many exciting features of

your new LCD TV. Before operating your LCD TV or TV/DVD

Combination, please read this manual completely, and keep it

nearby for future reference.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to

the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may be of

sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle,

is intended to alert the user to the presence of

important operating and maintenance (servicing)

instructions in the literature accompanying the

appliance.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock,

do not use the polarized plug with an extension

cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless the blades

can be inserted completely to prevent blade

exposure.

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer’s attention

to Article 820-40 of the NEC, which provides guidelines for proper

grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of

cable entry as practical. For additional antenna grounding information,

see item 26 on page 5.

Safety Precautions

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER

SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

ENERGY STAR® qualified TV. Products that earn

the ENERGY STAR prevent green house gas

emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency

guidelines set by the U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of

Energy. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR

mark are registered U.S. marks.

Congratulations on your purchase! As you enjoy your

new product, please keep these safety tips in mind:

The Issue

• The home theater entertainment experience is a growing trend

and larger flat panel displays are popular purchases. However,

flat panel displays are not always supported on the proper stands

or installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

• Flat panel displays that are

inappropriately situated on dressers,

bookcases, shelves, desks,

speakers, chests or carts may fall

over and cause injury.

TOSHIBA Cares!

• The consumer electronics industry

is committed to making home

entertainment enjoyable and safe.

Tune Into Safety

•

One size does NOT fit all. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendations

for the safe installation and use of your flat panel display.

• Carefully read and understand all enclosed instructions for

proper use of this product.

• Don’t allow children to climb on or play with furniture and

television sets.

• Don’t place flat panel displays on furniture

that can easily be used as steps, such

as a chest of drawers.

• Remember that children can

become excited while watching a

program, especially on a “larger

than life” flat panel display. Care

should be taken to place or install

the display where it cannot be

pushed, pulled over, or knocked down.

• Care should be taken to route all cords and

cables connected to the flat panel display so that they cannot be

pulled or grabbed by curious children.

Wall Mounting: If you decide to wall mount your

flat panel display, always:

• Use a mount that has been recommended by the display

manufacturer and/or listed by an independent laboratory (such

as UL, CSA, ETL).

• Follow all instructions supplied by the display and wall mount

manufacturers.

• If you have any doubts about your ability to safely install your

flat panel display, contact your retailer about professional

installation.

• Make sure that the wall where you are mounting the display is

appropriate. Some wall mounts are not designed to be mounted

to walls with steel studs or old cinder block construction. If you

are unsure, contact a professional

installer.

• A minimum of two people are

required for installation. Flat panel

displays can be heavy.

CHILD SAFETY:

It Makes A Difference How and Where You Use Your Flat

Panel Display

WARNING

: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated

with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a

chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or

other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Introduction

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION

PERFORMANCE STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

CAUTION:

THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ

THIS OWNER'S MANUAL CAREFULLY AND RETAIN FOR

FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE

MAINTENANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE

LOCATION.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE

OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN

MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, NEVER

OPEN THE ENCLOSURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE

PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. NEVER STARE

INTO BEAM.

FCC compliance information

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE

OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

FCC Declaration of Conformity Compliance Statement (Part 15):

The Toshiba 15LV505 LCD TV/DVD Combination complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The party responsible for compliance to these rules is:

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

82 Totowa Rd. Wayne, NJ 07470.

Ph: (800) 631-3811 or visit TACP·s website at www.tacp.Toshiba.com

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by removing and applying power to the equipment, the user is encouraged to

try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Toshiba could void the user·s authority to operate this

equipment.

ON DISPOSAL

The lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury. Disposal may be regulated due to environmental

considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the

Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

Introduction

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

15) To avoid damage to this product, never place or

store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas;

or areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

16)

Never modify this equipment. Changes or modiﬁ cations

may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user·s authority

operate this equipment under the rules of the

Federal Communications Commission.

17) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS

PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Never place

the TV on an unstable cart,

stand, or table. The TV may fall, causing

serious personal injury, death, or serious

damage to the TV.

18) Never place items such as vases, aquariums, or

candles on top of the TV.

19) WARNING: Always place the TV on the ﬂ oor or a

sturdy, level, stable

surface that can

support the weight

of the unit. To

secure the TV, use a

sturdy strap from the

hooks on the rear

of the TV pedestal

to a wall stud, pillar

or other immovable structure. Make sure the strap is

tight, secure, and parallel to the ﬂ oor.

20)

Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing

liquid or place items such as vases, aquariums, any

other item ﬁ lled with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.

21)

Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV

cabinet back, bottom, and sides.

Never place the TV:

•

on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;

• too close to drapes, curtains,

or walls; or

• in a conﬁ ned space such as

a bookcase, built-in cabinet,

or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV from

overheating and to help maintain reliable operation of the TV.

Leave a space of at least 4 inches around the TV.

22) Always place the back of the television at least four

(4) inches away from any vertical surface (such as a

wall) to allow proper ventilation.

23) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power

cord, and never place the TV where the power cord

is subject to wear or abuse.

24) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

25)

Always operate the TV with a 120V AC, 60Hz power source only.

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer·s instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including ampliﬁ ers) that produce heat.

Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has

two blades and a third grounding prong.

The wide blade or the third prong

are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁ t into

your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10)

Protect the power cord from being walked

on or pinched, particularly at plugs,

convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁ ed by the

manufacturer.

12)

Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table speciﬁ ed by the

manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus.

When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to avoid

injury from tip-over.

13)

Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused

for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualiﬁ ed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged

in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the

apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or

moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

Installation, Care, and Service

Installation

Follow these recommendations and precautions and

heed all warnings when installing your TV:

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not use the

polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet

unless the blades can be inserted completely with three-wire

grounding type to prevent blade exposure.

Important Safety Instructions

Hooks

TV side

TV top

Band

Sturdy tie (as short as possible; min. 4 in.)

Screw

Clip

Wide plug

Additional Safety Precautions

14a) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or

enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does

not operate normally, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power

cord to avoid possible electric shock or ﬁ re.

• NEVER allow your body to come in contact with

any broken glass or liquid from the damaged

television. The LCD panel inside the TV contains

glass and a toxic liquid. If the liquid comes in contact

with your mouth or eyes, or your skin is cut by

broken glass, rinse the affected area thoroughly

with

water and consult your doctor.

• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect

the TV any time it has been damaged or dropped.

14b) WARNING: To prevent the spread of ﬁ re, keep

candles or other open ﬂ ames away from this product

at all times.

Introduction

Installation (cont. from previous page)

26) Always make sure the antenna system is properly

grounded to provide adequate protection against

voltage surges and built-up static charges (see

Section 810 of the National Electric Code.)

27) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS

PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH!

• Use extreme care to make sure you

are never in a position where your body

(or any item

you are in contact with,

such

as a ladder or screwdriver) can

accidentally touch overhead power lines.

Never locate the antenna near overhead

power lines or other electrical circuits.

•

Never attempt to install any of the following during

lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,

wires, or any home theater component connected

to an antenna or phone system.

Care

For better performance and safer operation of your

TOSHIBA TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

28) Always unplug the TV before cleaning.

Wipe the display panel

surface gently using only a

soft cloth (cotton, ﬂ annel,

etc.) A hard cloth may

damage the surface of the

panel. Avoid contact with

alcohol, thinner, benzene,

acidic or and alkaline solvent cleaners, abrasive

cleaners, or chemical cloths, which may damage

the surface. Never spray volatile compounds such

as insecticide on the cabinet. Such products may

damage or discolor the cabinet

29)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of

any kind into the TV cabinet slots.

30)

While it is thundering, do not touch the connecting

cables or apparatus.

31)

For added protection of your TV from lightning and

power surges, always unplug the power cord and

disconnect the antenna from the TV if you leave the

TV unattended or unused for long periods of time.

Antenna discharge unit

(NEC Section 810-20)

Antenna

lead-in wire

Grounding conductors

(NEC Section 810-21)

Ground clamps

Power service grounding

electrode system

(NEC Art 250 Part H)

Ground clamp

Electric service

equipment

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

(Continued)

Care (cont. from previous column)

32) During normal use, the TV may make occasional

snap ping or popping sounds. This is normal,

especially when the unit is being turned on or off.

If these sounds become frequent or continuous,

unplug the power cord and contact a Toshiba

Authorized Service Center.

33)

Keep your ﬁ ngers well clear of the disc slot as it is closing.

Failure to do so may cause serious personal injury.

34) When you use headphones, keep the volume at a

moderate level. Using headphones continuously

at a high volume may cause hearing damage.

35)

NEVER look directly into the disc slot or ventilation

slots at the source of the laser beam. Doing so

may cause sight damage.

36) NEVER use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc.

Such discs are easily broken and may cause serious

personal injury or product damage. SUCH DAMAGE

IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR WARRANTY.

37) WARNING: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE!

• Never strike the screen with a sharp or heavy

object.

• Never touch, press, or place anything on the

LCD screen. These actions will damage the LCD

screen If you need to clean the LCD screen,

follow the instructions in item 28 on this page.

Service

38)

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never attempt to service the TV

yourself.

Opening and removing the covers

may expose you to dangerous voltage or other

hazards. Failure to follow this WARNING may

result in death or serious injury.

Refer all servicing to a Toshiba Authorized Service

Center.

39) If you have the TV serviced:

•

Ask the service technician to use only replacement

parts speciﬁ ed by the manufacturer.

• Upon completion of service, ask the service

technician to perform routine safety checks to

determine that the TV is in safe operating condition.

40) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life,

ask a qualiﬁ ed service technician to properly

dispose of the TV.

Introduction

Precautions

Notes on handling

Q Do not subject the LCD panel to physical shock, such

as dropping it. It may cause unit damage and malfunction.

Q When shipping the unit, the original shipping carton

and packing materials come in handy. For fully

protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed

at the factory.

Q Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide, near

the unit.

Do not leave rubber or plastic products in contact with

the unit for prolonged periods of time.

Doing so will leave marks on the ﬁ nish.

The top and rear panels of the unit may become warm

after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.

Q When the unit is not in use, always remove the disc

and turn off the power.

Notes on locating the unit

Q When you place this unit near a TV, radio, or VCR,

the playback picture may become poor and the sound

may be distorted. In this case, place the unit away

from the TV, radio, or VCR.

Q To avoid damage to this product, never place or store

the TV/DVD in direct sunlight; hot, humid areas; or

areas subject to excessive dust or vibration.

Optical pick-up

lens

Notes on moisture condensation

Moisture condensation damages the unit. Please

read the following carefully.

Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you

pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day and drops

of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same

way, moisture may condense on this unit·s internal optical

pick-up lens, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit.

Q Moisture condensation may occur in the following

situations:

When you move the unit from a cold area to a warm area.

When you use the unit in a room in which the heat

was just turned on.

When you use the unit in an area where cold air from

an air conditioner directly hits the unit.

When you use the unit in a humid area.

Wait!

Wall outlet

Q Never use the unit when moisture condensation

may occur

Using the unit when moisture condensation exists may

damage discs and internal parts. Connect the power

cord of the unit to the wall outlet, turn on the unit,

remove the disc, and leave it for two or three hours.

After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up

and evaporated any moisture. Leaving the TV

connected to the wall outlet will help prevent moisture

condensation in the TV or DVD Player.

Choosing a location for your LCD TV

To Display your LCD TV on the included Pedestal Stand:

Observe the following safety precautions:

1) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can

support the weight of the TV.

2) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall, pillar, surface, or

other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this

manner, use the included strap located at the rear of

pedestal stand. (see item 19, page 4).

Important notes about your LCD TV

The following symptoms are technical limitations of

LCD Display technology and are not an indication of

malfunction; therefore, Toshiba is not responsible for

perceived defects resulting from these symptoms.

1) An after image (ghost) may appear on the screen

if a ﬁ xed, non-moving image is displayed for a long

period of time. The after image is not permanent and

will disappear in a short period of time.

2) The LCD panel contained in this TV is manufactured

using an extremely high level of precision technology;

however, there may be an occasional pixel (dot of light)

that does not operate properly (does not light, remains

constantly lit, etc.). This is a structural property of

LCD

technology, is not a sign of malfunction, and is

not covered under your warranty. Such pixels are

not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal

viewing distance.

Note: Interactive video games that involve shooting a

“gun” type of joystick at an on-screen target may not

work on this TV.

Introduction

On handling discs

Do not touch the playback side of the disc.

For example, handle the disc so that it is shown in

ﬁ gure below.

Do not attach paper or tape to discs.

On cleaning discs

Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and

sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center

outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc

clean.

Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner,

benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic

spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.

On storing discs

Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight

or near heat sources.

Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and

dust such as a bathroom or near a humidiﬁ er.

Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing

objects on discs outside of their case may cause

warping.

Playback side

Title 1 Title 2

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3

DVD video disc

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5

Video CD/Audio CD

Notes on discs

Structure of disc contents

Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and

the titles are sub-divided into chapters. Video CDs and

Audio CDs are divided into tracks.

DVD video disc

Video CD/Audio CD

Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which

is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track

number” respectively.

There may be discs that do not have these numbers.

About this owner·s manual

This owner·s manual explains the basic instructions of this

unit. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner

that allows speciﬁ c or limited operation during playback. As

such, the unit may not respond to all operating command.

This is not a defect in the unit. Refer to instruction notes of

discs.

The following symbol may appear on the TV screen during

operation.

It means that the operation is not permitted by the TV/DVD

or the disc.

For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback

of copyright message of the disc when the STOP (Q)

button is pressed. Alternatively, this symbol may also

indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.

Notes on region numbers

The region number of this unit is 1. If region numbers,

which stand for their playable area, are printed on your

DVD video disc and you do not ﬁ nd

ALL

, disc

playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case,

the unit will display a message on-screen.)

Some DVDs that have no region code label may still be

subject to area restrictions and therefore not playable.

On Video CDs

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC

(Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of

Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations

depending on types of discs.

•

Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1)

Sound and movie can be played on this unit in the same

way as a DVD.

•

Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0)

In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with

the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive

software with search function by using the menu

displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of

the functions described in this owner·s manual may not

work with some discs.

Notes on copyright

The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision

of copyrighted materials including, without limitation,

television programs, videotapes, and DVDs, is prohibited

under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other

countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.

Introduction

Playable discs

This unit can play the following discs.

• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.

• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, CD-

ROM, Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even

if they may be labeled as above.

• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending

on the recording conditions.

• This unit uses the NTSC color system, and cannot

play DVD video discs recorded in any other color

system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).

• This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a

disc adapter. It may cause trouble.

• Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into

the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.

You may not be able to remove it.

• Please do not use after market accessories, such as a

ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the

operation of the unit.

Because of problems and errors that can occur during the

creation of DVD and CD Software and/or the manufacture

of DVD and CD discs, Toshiba cannot assure that the

DVD player contained in this TV will successfully play

every disc bearing the DVD and CD logos.

If you happen to experience any difﬁ culty playing a DVD

and/or CD disc on the DVD player contained in this TV,

please contact Toshiba Customer Service.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing

Corporation.

Disc Mark Contents

Disc

Size

Maximum

playback time

DVD

video

discs

Audio

Video

(moving

pictures)

12 cm

Approx. 4 hours

(single sided disc)

Approx. 8 hours

(double sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 80 minutes

(single sided disc)

Approx. 160 minutes

(double sided disc)

Video

CDs

DIGITAL VIDEO

Audio

Video

(moving

pictures)

12 cm

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

Audio

CDs Audio

12 cm

Approx. 74 minutes

(single sided disc)

8 cm

Approx. 20 minutes

(single sided disc)

The following discs are also available.

DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format

CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, MP3, WMA or

JPEG format

Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format

Some of these discs may be incompatible.

Notes on discs (Continued)

Introduction

Contents

Introduction

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................................ 4

Precautions....................................................... 6

Notes on discs .................................................. 7

Contents ........................................................... 9

Identiﬁ cation of controls ..................................10

Connections

Antenna connections ...................................... 14

Cable TV connections .................................... 15

Connecting to optional equipment .................. 16

Power source.................................................. 19

Basic setup

Auto setup ...................................................... 20

Setting the language....................................... 21

To memorize channels.................................... 22

TV operation

TV operation ................................................... 25

Labeling channels........................................... 27

Labeling video inputs ...................................... 28

Setting the V-Chip........................................... 29

Setting the closed captions............................. 33

CC advanced .................................................. 34

Adjusting the picture preference ..................... 35

Picture settings ............................................... 35

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats ........ 36

Film Mode ....................................................... 37

DNR ................................................................ 37

Sound control adjustment ............................... 38

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP) .... 38

Selecting the audio language ......................... 39

Using the aspect feature................................. 40

Adjusting the back lighting .............................. 40

Setting the Auto Shut Off ................................ 41

Resetting your settings ................................... 41

Basic playback

Playing a disc ................................................. 42

Advanced playback

Zooming.......................................................... 45

Locating desired scene................................... 45

Marking desired scenes.................................. 46

Repeat playback ............................................. 47

A-B Repeat playback ...................................... 47

Program playback........................................... 48

Random playback ........................................... 48

Changing angles..............................................49

Title selection ...................................................49

DVD menu .......................................................49

Changing soundtrack language .......................50

Subtitles ...........................................................50

Disc status .......................................................51

To turn off the PBC ..........................................51

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation ......52

Repeat, random and program playback

using ﬁ le browser.............................................55

Function setup

Customizing the function settings ....................57

Temporary cancel the rating level

by DVD disc .....................................................61

Others

Understanding the Power Return feature ........62

Troubleshooting ...............................................62

Reception disturbances ...................................64

Language code list ..........................................65

Speciﬁ cations ..................................................66

Limited United States Warranty .......................67

Introduction

Identification of controls

Speaker

Front

Remote sensor 13

Side

Disc slot 42

EJECT button 43

CH 25 / PLAY button 42

VOLUME (+/–) buttons 25

CH 25 /QSTOP button 42

MENU button 21 57

INPUT/ENTER button 16

POWER button 20

Top

POWER indicator 20

Introduction

Rear

AC INPUT 19

HEAD PHONE jack 26

COLORSTREAM HD IN jacks 17

VIDEO/GAME IN jack 16 17

COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack 18 19

Antenna jack 14 15

AC INPUT

cover 19

Introduction

SLOW ( ) button

Direction buttons ( / / / )

EJECT button

DISPLAY button

Numbered buttons (0

5126

SUBTITLE button

INPUT button

ZOOM button

MENU button

SETUP button

PLAY MODE button

47 51

PLAY button

PAUSE button

TOP MENU button

RETURN button

GAME button

5753

TV/DVD button

Direct channel selection

buttons (0

CH RTN button CLOSED CAPTION button

SKIP ( ) button

REV button

FF button

POWER button

JUMP button

Direct channel selection button ( )

AUDIO SELECT button

MUTE button

EXIT/CANCEL button

SKIP ( )button

STOP button

REPEAT A-B button

PIC SIZE button

SE-R0305

ENTER button

SLEEP button

*DVD MENU button

VOL +/– button

SLOW ( ) button

MARKER button

ANGLE button

CH / button

4220

Remote control

The instructions in this manual describe the function on the remote control. See the page in for details.

*DVD MENU button

Use the DVD MENU button to

display the menu included on

many DVD video discs.

To operate a menu, follow the

instructions in “DVD menu.” 49

Identification of controls (Continued)

Introduction

Replace the compartment

cover.

Install two “R03/AAA” batteries

(supplied), paying attention to

the polarity indicated in the

battery compartment.

Open the battery compartment

cover in the direction of the

arrow.

123

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.

•

Operate the remote control within 30° angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 5 meters.

Caution:

• Never throw batteries into a ﬁ re.

Note:

•Be sure to use AAA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

•

Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with

applicable laws and regulations.

• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with

new ones.

• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones.

Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.

•

Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended

period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.

Inserting batteries

Operation

Approx. 5 meters

Connections

75 ohm coaxial cable

(not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching

transformer (not supplied)

300-75 ohm matching

transformer (not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

VHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

UHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire

(not supplied)

VHF 75 ohm

(not supplied)

Antenna

jack

Antenna

jack

Antenna

jack

Combiner

(not supplied)

Antenna

jack

Combiner

(not supplied)

Connect the 75 ohm cable from the combination

VHF/UHF antenna to the antenna jack on the back

of the TV/DVD.

If your combination VHF/UHF antenna has a 300

ohm twin-lead wire, use the 300-75 ohm matching

transformer (not supplied).

Connect the UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wire to the

combiner (not supplied). Connect the VHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire to the 300-75 ohm matching transformer

(not supplied). Attach the transformer to the combiner,

then attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the

back of the TV/DVD.

Connect the VHF 75 ohm cable and UHF 300 ohm

twin-lead wire to the combiner (not supplied).

Attach the combiner to the antenna jack on the back

of the TV/DVD.

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Separate VHF and UHF 300 ohm twin-lead wires)

Antenna connections

If you are using an indoor or outdoor antenna, follow the instructions below that correspond to your antenna system.

If you are using a cable TV service (CABLE), see 15 for Cable TV connections.

Separate VHF/UHF antennas (75 ohm VHF cable and 300 ohm UHF twin-lead wires)

Combination VHF/UHF antenna (Single 75 ohm cable or 300 ohm twin-lead wire)

Connections

For basic cable service not requiring a converter/descrambler

box, connect the Cable TV 75 ohm coaxial cable directly to the

Antenna jack on the back of the TV/DVD.

75 ohm

coaxial cable

If you subscribe to a cable TV service in which basic channels are unscrambled and premium channels require

the use of a converter/descrambler box, you may wish to use a signal splitter and an A/B Switch box (available

from the cable company or an electronics supply store). Follow the connections shown below. With the switch in

the “B” position, you can directly tune any nonscrambled channels on your TV/DVD. With the switch in the “A”

position, tune your TV/DVD to the output of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4) and use the

converter/descrambler box to tune scrambled channels.

Incoming 75 ohm

Cable TV

75 ohm cable to

TV/DVD

Antenna

jack

Antenna

jack

Converter/

descrambler

If you subscribe to a cable TV service which requires the use of a converter/descrambler box, connect the

incoming 75 ohm coaxial cable to the converter/descrambler box. Using another 75 ohm coaxial cable, connect

the output jack of the converter/descrambler box to the antenna jack on the TV/DVD. Follow the connections

shown below. Set the TV/DVD to the output channel of the converter/descrambler box (usually channel 3 or 4)

and use the converter/descrambler box to select channels.

For subscribers to basic cable TV service

For subscribers to scrambled cable TV service

For subscribers to unscrambled basic cable TV service with scrambled

premium channels

Splitter B

Incoming

75 ohm

Cable TV A/B switch

75 ohm cable

to TV/DVD

Converter/

descrambler Antenna

jack

Cable TV connections

This TV/DVD has an extended tuning range and can tune most cable channels without using a Cable TV converter box.

Some cable companies offer “premium pay channels” in which the signal is scrambled. Descrambling these signals for

normal viewing requires the use of a descrambler device which is generally provided by the cable company.

Connections

To playback from the VCR, connect the VCR to the TV/DVD as shown.

Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

You can enjoy playing a TV game on the screen by adjusting to the suitable brightness for your eyes.

1. Connect a TV Game to the TV/DVD.

2. Select the Game mode by pressing GAME. The Game mode screen appears.

• If GAME is pressed during standby mode, the unit turns on automatically and the Game mode screen

appears on the screen.

Camcorder

To Audio/Video OUT

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

To Audio/Video OUT

INPUT

Connecting to a VCR

Connecting to a TV Game

Connecting to optional equipment

You can enjoy VCR, camcorder or TV game with connection to external input.

Note:

• You can also change the TV/DVD screen to the desired mode by pressing the CH / .

• The TV/DVD can also be used as a display device for many video games. However, due to the wide variety of

different types of signal generated by these devices and subsequent hook-up variations required, they have not all

been included in the suggested connection diagrams. You·ll need to consult each component·s Owner·s Manual

for additional information.

• Interactive video games that involve shooting a “gun” type of joystick at on-screen target may not work on this

TV/DVD.

: Signal ﬂ ow

Using the audio/video inputs

Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV/DVD, such

as a VCR player. You can select TV, Video or ColorStream HD depending on which

input jacks you used to connect your devices.

Press INPUT on the remote control to display the current signal source.

To change the input source, press INPUT again or press 0-2. (3is for selection DVD

mode.)

To Audio/Video OUT

(yellow)

(red)

(white)

Audio/Video cable (not supplied)

VCR

To VIDEO/GAME IN

To playback from the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the TV/DVD as shown.

Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

Connecting to a camcorder

Back side

GAME

0-3

CH /

Source Selection

1.Video

2.ColorStream HD

3.DVD

[0-3]:Select

0.TV

Back side

(yellow)

(red)

(white)

Back side

(yellow)

(red)

(white)

To VIDEO/GAME IN

Connections

If you connect a VCR with an S-Video cable to the S-VIDEO IN jack on the left side of the TV/DVD, you must

also connect the audio cables to the AUDIO IN jacks as shown below. The S-Video cable only carries the video

signal. The audio signal is separated.

Select the “Video” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

Note:

When the S-Video cable and the standard video cable are connected at the same time, the S-video cable takes

precedence.

•

Connecting to an optional equipment with S-video output

Ex. VCR with S-Video

To S-VIDEO OUT

To Audio (L/R) OUT

To S-VIDEO IN

Audio cable (not supplied)

S-Video cable (not supplied)

Connecting an optional equipment with ColorStream

(Component video) output

Your TV/DVD is capable of using ColorStream® (component video). Connecting your TV/DVD to a component

video compatible DVD player, such as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream® can greatly enhance picture

quality and performance.

Select the “ColorStream HD” by pressing INPUT repeatedly.

Ex. DVD player with Component video

Audio cable (not supplied)

Component video cable

(not supplied)

To Audio (L/R) OUT To Component Video OUT

To COLORSTREAM HD

AUDIO (L/R) IN

To COLORSTREAM HD

(Y, PB, PR) IN

When using the Component video cable,

an Audio cable must be connected to

COLORSTREAM HD AUDIO(L/R) IN jacks.

Note:

• The ColorStream® (component video) inputs on this unit are for use with devices that output 480i, 1080i inter-

laced signals and 480p, 720p progressive signals.

• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the unit to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment

from the wall outlet before making any connections.

• If you place the unit near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the

unit away from the tuner and radio.

: Signal ﬂ ow

(playback)

(red)

(white)

To AUDIO (L/R) IN

Back side

(red)

(white)

To VIDEO/GAME IN

Connections

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce

this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital

recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the TV/DVD to a 6 channel ampliﬁ er equipped with a Dolby

Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Surround Pro Logic decoder, you will obtain the full beneﬁ t of

Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the

Dolby Surround mark.

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a Dolby® Digital decoder

Manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

Ampliﬁ er equipped with a

Dolby Digital decoder

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a DTS® decoder

Digital Theater Systems (DTS)

DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.

If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full beneﬁ t of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD

video discs or audio CDs.

Manufactured under license

under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 &

other U.S. and worldwide

patents issued & pending. DTS

and DTS Digital Out are

registered trademarks and the

DTS logos and Symbol are

trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Reserved.

Ampliﬁ er equipped with

a DTS decoder

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

Back side

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

: Front speaker

: Rear speaker

: Sub woofer

: Center speaker

: Signal ﬂ ow

*This section uses the following reference mark.

MPEG2 sound

You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic

realistic sound by connecting an ampliﬁ er equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with an MPEG audio decoder

Ampliﬁ er equipped with an

MPEG2 audio decoder

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)

You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds by connecting the

TV/DVD to optional audio equipment.

Back side

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

Back side

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

Connections

Ampliﬁ er equipped with a

Digital audio input

To COAXIAL

type digital

audio input

75 Ω coaxial cable (not supplied)

Connecting to an ampliﬁ er equipped with a digital audio input

2 channel digital stereo

You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an ampliﬁ er equipped with a digital audio input and speaker

system (right and left front speakers).

Note: PCM audio is limited to DVD or CD playback.

Note:

• DO NOT connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.

This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack

of the TV/DVD.

• Connect the COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack of the TV/DVD to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.

• Refer to the owner·s manual of the connected equipment as well.

• When you connect the TV/DVD to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet

before making any connections.

•

The output sound of the TV/DVD has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver·s volume to a moderate listening level.

Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.

• Turn off the ampliﬁ er before you connect or disconnect the TV/DVD·s power cord. If you leave the ampliﬁ er·s power on, the speakers

may be damaged.

Back side

To COAXIAL DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

Connecting to optional equipment (Continued)/

Power source

Note:

Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.

If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s

responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.

If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet

and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.

If the AC cord plug is plugged in for the first time, wait for approx. 5 seconds before pressing POWER.

•

To use AC power source

Open the AC INPUT cover.

Connect the AC cord plug into this TV/DVD’s AC INPUT jack, then close the AC INPUT cover.

Connect the AC cord into an AC outlet.

AC cord (supplied)

AC 120V, 60Hz

Wider Hole

and Blade

AC Outlet

Basic setup

Auto Setup

The Auto Setup function helps to install your TV/DVD easily.

It leads you the Language selection, Air/Cable selection and Automatic

channel search.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the antenna or cable TV system

connection is made!

POWER

EXIT/CANCEL

/ / /

ENTER

1To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.

POWER indicator on the front of the unit

changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds

for a picture to appear on screen.

•

2Auto Setup menu appears on the screen.

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”, then

press ϵ or ϶ to select your desired language.

Automatic Search

Auto Setup

Language

Signal Type Cable

Start

English

: Adjust

: Select

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”, then

press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

Automatic Search

Auto Setup

Language

Signal Type Cable

Start

English

: Adjust

: Select

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable

- Cable TV channels

4Press ϳ or ϴto select “Automatic Search”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

Auto Setup

Language

Signal Type Cable

Start

English

: Select

Automatic Search

ENTER:Set

5Now the “Automatic Search” starts.

Auto Setup

Language

Signal Type Cable

Start

Digtal Channel Found :

Analog Channel Found : 0

English

EXIT : End

Automatic Search

If you press EXIT/CANCEL, the Automatic

Search stops and changes to the TV screen.

After the starting setup is completed, the TV

channel appears on the screen.

•

Note:

The Auto Setup function will work only when you

press POWER for the first time.

The process of “Automatic Search” may take 15 to

30 minutes to complete, depending on your regional

cable service.

•

Basic setup

Setting the language

This TV/DVD can display the on screen language in English, French or

Spanish.

Select the language you prefer ﬁ rst, then proceed with the other menu options.

EXIT/CANCEL

1To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.

POWER indicator on the front of the unit

changes blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds

for a picture to appear on screen.

•

2Press MENU. The TV menu screen will

appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Setup”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Language”.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Aspect

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Adjust

: Select

4Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired language:

English, French (Français) or Spanish

(Español).

5Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Note:

If the unit does not operate properly, or No key

operation (by the unit and/or the remote control):

Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD’s

operation. In such case, disconnect the AC cord once,

then connect it again.

If no buttons are pressed for more than about 60

seconds, the MENU screen will return to normal

operation automatically.

The TV section has its own menu and the DVD

section also has its own menu 57 .

•

/ / /

ENTER

POWER

Basic setup

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

Ch Label >>

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Auto Ch Memory

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Signal Type”.

Automatic Search Start

Auto Ch Memory

Signal Type Cable

4Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Air” or “Cable”.

Automatic Search Start

Auto Ch Memory

Signal Type Air

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable

- Cable TV channels

5Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

/ / /

To memorize channels

This TV/DVD is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows

channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping

over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be

programmed into the TV/DVD·s memory. To use this TV/DVD with an antenna,

set the Signal Type option to the Air mode. When shipped from the factory, this

menu option is in the Cable mode.

Air/Cable selection

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Ch Memory”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

: Select ENTER:Set

Ch Label >>

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Auto Ch Memory

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Automatic Search”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

Auto Ch Memory

Signal Type Cable

Digital Channel Found : 0

Analog Channel Found : 0

: Select ENTER:Cancel

Automatic Search Stop

4The TV/DVD will begin memorizing all the

channels available in your area.

Automatic search

Basic setup

Add/Delete channel

You can select the channel that you want to skip.

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

: Select ENTER:Set

Ch Label >>

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Auto Ch Memory

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

Clear All >>

Add/Delete

Adding Channel >>

: Select ENTER:Set

Add/Delete>>

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

4Press ϳ or ϴ to select the channel that you

want to skip.

CH Signal

2Analog

3Analog Add

3-001 Digital Delete

3-002 DigitalAdd

4Analog Delete

Add/Delete

: Adjust

Add

: Select

5Press ϵ or ϶ to select “Add” or “Delete”,

whichever function you want to perform.

CH Signal

2Analog

3Analog Add

3-001 Digital Delete

3-002 DigitalAdd

4Analog Delete

Add/Delete

: Adjust

Delete

: Select

6Repeat steps 4 - 5 for other channels you

want to add or delete.

7Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Basic setup

If you find a new channel unregistered, you can add the

new channel into the channel memory.

1Tune in the new channel.

2Press MENU. The TV menu screen will appear.

Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Channel”, then press

϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

: Select ENTER:Set

Ch Label >>

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Auto Ch Memory

4Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Adding Channel”,

then press ϶ or ENTER. The new channel will

be added into the channel memory.

Add/Delete>>

Clear All >>

Add/Delete

Adding Channel >>

: Select ENTER:Set

5Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Adding Channel

/ /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

All channels are deleted from the channel memory.

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Channel”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Add/Delete”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

: Select ENTER:Set

Ch Label >>

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Auto Ch Memory

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Clear All”, then press

϶ or ENTER.

Add/Delete>>

Add/Delete

Adding Channel >>

: Select ENTER:Set

Clear All >>

4Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Clear All

To memorize channels (Continued)

TV operation

1To turn on the TV/DVD, press POWER.

(POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes

blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture

to appear on screen.)

2Adjust the volume level by pressing VOL + or – .

The volume level will be indicated on the screen

by orange bars. As the volume level increases, so

do the number of bars. If the volume decreases,

the number of orange bars also decreases.

3Set the Signal Type option to the appropriate

position (see “Air/Cable selection” 22 ).

Air - VHF/UHF channels

Cable

- Cable TV channels

4Press the Direct Channel Selection (0-9, –)

buttons or CH / to select the channel.

(If you press only channel number, channel

selection will be delayed for a few seconds.)

TV operation

POWER

TV operation

0–9, –

VOL +/–

CH /

TO SELECT ANALOG CHANNELS

1-9: Press 1-9 as needed. Example, to

select channel 2, press 2.

10-99: Press the 2 digits in order. Example, to

select channel 12, press 1,2.

100-125: Press the 3 digits in order. Example, to

select channel 120, press 1,2,0.

TO SELECT DIGITAL CHANNELS

Press the first 3 digits, then press the –button,

followed by the remaining number.

Example, to select channel 015-001, press 0, 1,

5, –, 0, 0, 1.

If a channel is selected with only audio content,

“Audio only” will be displayed on the screen.

If a channel is selected with a weak digital

signal, “Digital channel signal strength is low”

will be displayed on the screen.

The same program may be available on either

an analog channel or a digital channel. You may

choose to watch either format.

If a channel is selected to which you have not

subscribed,

“Digital channel is encrypted” will

be displayed on the screen.

•

VHF/UHF/CABLE CHANNELS

AirCable

VHF

2-13

VHF

2-13

UHF

14-69

STD/HRC/IRC

14-36 (A) (W)

37-59 (AA) (WW)

60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ)

86-94 (86) (94)

95-99 (A-5) (A-1)

100-125 (100) (125)

01 (5A)

Note:

If a channel with no broadcast is selected, the sound

will automatically be muted.

It may take a few seconds for a digital channel picture

to appear on screen after being selected.

•

TV operation

Ϯ DISPLAY

Press DISPLAY to display the current information on the

screen.

When the TV/DVD

receives a digital signal,

the digital information

will appear.

62-001 HDTV Moving Picture1

CH-1

Digital Air

No Program Information is available

Sleep Timer

Off

English

Natural

1080i

Channel number • Station name

Channel label (if preset) •

Broadcast program name

V-Chip rating • Signal type

Sleep timer • Audio language

Program guide • Picture size

Resolution

•

When the TV/DVD

receives a analog signal,

the analog information

will appear.

Analog Cable

Sleep Timer

Off

Natural

480i

Channel number • Channel label (if preset)

V-Chip rating • Signal type

Sleep timer •

Audio information (Stereo or SAP)

Picture size • Resolution

Press DISPLAY again to clear the call display.

•

Note:

After a few seconds, DISPLAY screen will return to

normal TV-operation automatically.

•

Ϯ CH RTN

This button allows you to go back to the last channel

selected by pressing CH RTN. Press CH RTN again to

return to the last channel you were watching.

Ϯ MUTE

Press MUTE to switch off the sound. The TV/DVD’s

sound will be silenced and “Mute” will appear on the

screen. The sound can be switched back on by pressing

this button again or the VOL + or –.

TV operation (continued)

Ϯ SLEEP

To set the TV/DVD to

turn off after a preset

amount of time, press

SLEEP on the remote

control. The clock will

count up 10 minutes for

Sleep Timer

0h 10m

each press of the SLEEP button (Off, 0h 10m, 0h 20m,

..., 2h 0m). After the sleep time is programmed, the

display will appear briefly every ten minutes to remind

you that the sleep timer is operating. To confirm the

sleep timer setting, press SLEEP and the remaining

time will be displayed for a few seconds. To cancel the

sleep timer, press SLEEP repeatedly until the display

turns to Off.

ϮHEAD PHONES

Insert a stereo headphones (not supplied) with a 1/8” mini

plug into the HEAD PHONE jack on the rear panel.

If you connect headphones, the sound from TV/DVD

speakers is muted.

DISPLAY

CH RTN

VOL +/–

SLEEP

MUTE

TV operation (Continued)

TV operation

Labeling channels

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Channel” menu, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Ch Label”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

The “Ch Label” menu will appear.

: Select ENTER:Set

Channel

Add/Delete>>

Ch Label >>

Auto Ch Memory

3Press ϵ or ϶ to select a channel you want to

label, then press ϴ.

Ch Label

Label Clear>>

: Adjust

Ch Label

Channel Number 15-1

: Select

4Press ϵ or ϶ repeatedly until the character

you want appears in the first space.

Label Clear>>

: Adjust

Ch Label

Channel Number 15-1

: Select

Ch Label A

ENTER:Set

The characters rotation as follows:

SPACE

, () @ / + =

If the character which you desire appears, press

ENTER.

Repeat this step to enter the rest of the

characters.

If you would like a blank space in the label name,

you must choose the empty space from the list of

characters.

5When you finish inputting the label name,

press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

6Repeat steps 3-5 for other channel. You can

assign a label to each channel.

To clear a Ch Label

After step 3 above, press ϳ or ϴ to select “Label Clear”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

Note:

The channel labels will be reset after “Automatic

Search” 22 .

•

Labeling channels

Channel label appear with the channel number display each time you turn on the

TV/DVD, select a channel, or press DISPLAY.

You can choose any four characters to identify a channel.

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

TV operation

Labeling video inputs

The Video Label feature allows you to label each input source for your TV/DVD.

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

Labeling video inputs

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Video Label”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Aspect

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select ENTER:Set

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select an input which you

want to label.

ColorStream HD -

Video Label

: Adjust

: Select

Video -

4Press ϵ or ϶ to select the desired label for

that input source.

Video Label

: Adjust

ColorStream HD SAT

: Select

Video -

– : Uses the default label name

VCR : Video cassette recorder

DVD : DVD video

DTV : Digital TV set-top box

SAT : Satellite box

CBL : Cable box

5Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip

An age limitation can be set to restrict children from viewing or hearing

violent scenes or pictures that you may choose to exclude. The restriction

applies to “TV Rating” and “Movie Rating” if this data is transmitted. You may

set this restriction separately. To use the V-Chip function, you must register

a password.

0–9

/ /

ENTER

To register a password

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Select and enter your password (4 digits)

using Number buttons (0-9), then press

ENTER.

[0-9]

Lock

: Select ENTER:Set

New Password

----

3Enter the same password again to confirm,

then press ENTER.

The password is now registered.

[0-9]

Lock

: Select ENTER:Set

Confirm Password

----

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Change Password”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

The Change Password screen will appear.

V-Chip Set>>

Lock

V-Chip Off

: Select ENTER: Set

V-Chip Set (DTV) >>

Update>>

Change Password >>

3Enter a new password using Number buttons

(0-9), then press ENTER.

[0-9]

Change Password

Confirm Password

: Select ENTER:Set

New Password

----

4Enter the same password again to confirm,

then press ENTER.

The new password is now registered.

To change a password

Notes:

If you forget the password, press DISPLAY four times within

ﬁ ve seconds while the TV is in password entering mode. This

allows you to reset your password.

Note:

The V-Chip feature is available only for the U.S. V-Chip

system. The Canadian V-Chip system is not supported.

•

DISPLAY

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

To set the V-Chip

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-

word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will

appear.

[0-9]

Lock

: Select ENTER:Set

Password

----

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip”, then press

ϵ or ϶ to select “On” .

V-Chip Set>>

Lock

V-Chip On

: Select

V-Chip Set (DTV) >>

Update>>

Change Password >>

: Adjust

4Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

The V-Chip Set Menu appears.

Lock

V-Chip On

: Select ENTER: Set

V-Chip Set (DTV) >>

Update>>

Change Password >>

V-Chip Set>>

5Press ϳ or ϴ to select which rating will be

used, then press ϶ or ENTER. Each rating

below will appear.

V-Chip Set

TV Rating >>

: Select ENTER: Set

Movie Rating >>

TV Rating

ALL D L S V FV

TV-Y

TV-Y7

TV-G

TV-PG

TV-14

TV-MA

ENTER:Set

TV Rating

: Select

You can set the rating using age level and genre.

Age:

TV-Y : All children

TV-Y7 : 7 years old and above

TV-G : General audience

TV-PG : Parental guidance

TV-14 : 14 years old and above

TV-MA : 17 years old and above

Genre:

ALL : All

D: Dialogue

L: Language

S: Sex

V: Violence

FV : Fantasy Violence

0–9

/ / /

ENTER

TV operation

Movie Rating

PG-13

NC-17

ENTER:Set

Movie Rating

: Select

G: All ages

PG : Parental guidance

PG-13: Parental guidance less than 13 years old

R: Under 17 years old parental guidance

suggested

NC-17 : 17 years old and above

X: Adult only

6Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired rating, then

press ENTER.

7Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

To use the TV/DVD after it is protected.

When a program is received that is blocked by the V-

Chip, press MUTE, then enter your password.

The protection will be temporarily overridden. If the TV/

DVD is turned off or the channel is changed, the V-Chip

restriction will be reactivated.

Note:

The V-Chip function is activated only on programs and

input sources that include a rating signal.

•

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

MUTE

TV operation

Setting the V-Chip (Continued)

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Lock”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Use Number buttons (0-9) to enter your pass-

word, then press ENTER. Then Lock menu will

appear.

[0-9]

Lock

: Select ENTER:Set

Password

----

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “V-Chip Set (DTV)”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

V-Chip Set>>

Lock

V-Chip On

: Select

V-Chip Set (DTV) >>

Update>>

Change Password >>

ENTER:Set

4If the TV/DVD is not storing the additional

rating system, the TV/DVD will begin down-

loading it, which may take some time to be

completed.

5Set your preferred content rating limits for the

additional rating system.

6You also need “Update” procedure to update

rating information.

Note:

You can only download the additional V-Chip rating

system when your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal.

When you download the additional rating system, it

may take some time for the download to occur.

The V-Chip rating information and system are not

determined or controlled by the TV/DVD.

The standard V-Chip rating system is available

whether your TV/DVD is receiving a digital signal or

not, and will block both analog and digital programs.

To set the restriction level using the standard V-Chip

rating system, select “V-Chip Set” in step 3.

The downloadable V-Chip rating system is an evolving

technology, and availability, content, and format may

vary.

You cannot select this feature if the TV/DVD is not

receiving a digital signal for the current station.

•

To download the additional V-Chip rating system (when available)

As a supplement to the standard V-Chip rating system, your television will

be able to download an additional rating system, if such a system becomes

available in the future.

0–9

/ /

ENTER

TV operation

Setting the closed captions

WHAT IS CLOSED CAPTIONING?

This television has the capability to decode and display closed captioned

television programs. Closed captioning will display text on the screen for

hearing impaired viewers or it will translate and display text in another

language.

Setting the closed captions

1Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to

select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

The Closed Caption menu will appear.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Aspect

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select ENTER:Set

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Setting”, then

press ϵ or ϶ to select “On”.

On: Captions will be displayed on the screen.

Off: Captions will not be displayed on the screen.

CC Priority

Closed Caption

CC Setting Off

Digital CC

CS1

Default

: Select

Analog Caption

Digital Caption

Digital CC Preset

CC Advanced >>

: Adjust

4Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Analog Caption” or

“Digital Caption”, then press ϵ or ϶ to select

the desired Closed Caption mode.

When you select “Analog Caption”, you can

choose C1, C2, C3, C4, T1, T2, T3 and T4.

When you select “Digital Caption”, you can

choose from CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS5 and CS6.

CC Priority

Closed Caption

CC Setting On

Digital CC

CS1

Default

: Select

Analog Caption

Digital Caption

Digital CC Preset

CC Advanced >>

: Adjust

5Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Priority”, then

press ϵ or ϶ to select “Digital CC” or “Analog

CC”.

Note:

Depending on the broadcast signal, some

Analog Captions will function with a Digital

broadcast signal. This step prevent that two kind

of captions are overlapping.

•

6Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

Important Note:

If text is not available in your viewing area, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, set

“CC Setting” to “Off”.

Note:

You can also display the Closed Caption menu screen by pressing CLOSED CAPTION on the remote control.

Digital caption feature is not available for analog channel.

•

CLOSED CAPTION

TV operation

CC advanced

1Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to

select “Setup”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Closed Caption”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

The Closed Caption menu will appear.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select ENTER:Set

Aspect

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Digital CC Preset”,

then press ϵ or ϶ to select “Custom”.

CC Priority

Closed Caption

CC Setting On

Digital CC

CS1

Custom

: Select

Analog Caption

Digital Caption

Digital CC Preset

CC Advanced >>

: Adjust

4Press ϳ or ϴ to select “CC Advanced”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

The CC Advanced menu will appear.

CC Priority

Closed Caption

CC Setting On

Digital CC

CS1

Custom

: Select

Analog Caption

Digital Caption

Digital CC Preset

CC Advanced >>

ENTER:Set

5Press ϳ or ϴ to select the desired item,

then press ϵ or ϶ to change the setting.

CC Advanced

Tex t Size Auto

Tex t Type Auto

Tex t Edge Auto

Tex t Color Auto

Tex t Opacity Auto

Background Color Auto

Background Opacity Auto

: Adjust

: Select

You can select from among the following items

and parameters.

Text Size: Auto, Small, Standard, Large

Text Type: Auto, Style1, Style2, Style3,

Style4, Style5, Style6, Style7

Text Edge: Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,

Uniform, Left Shadow, Right

Shadow

Text Color: Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,

Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Text Opacity: Auto, Solid, Transparent,

Translucent, Flashing

Background

Color:

Auto, Black, White, Red, Green,

Blue, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Background

Opacity:

Auto, Solid, Transparent,

Translucent, Flashing

6Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Note:

You cannnot select “CC Advanced” in the menu

before set “Digital CC preset” to “Custom”.

You cannot set the Closed Caption “Text Color” and

“Background Color” as the same color.

•

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

CC advanced

When you have selected Custom as the display method, you can adjust the

various setting listed below as follows:

This feature is designed to customize Digital Captions only.

TV operation

Adjusting the picture preference

Adjusting the picture preference/

Picture settings

You can select four picture modes—Sports, Standard, Movie and Memory—

as described in the following table:

Picture settings are factory preset but you can adjust them individually as

follows: / / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

Picture settings

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Setting”, then

press ϶ or ENTER.

The Picture Setting menu will appear.

DNR On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode

: Select ENTER:Set

3Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to

adjust. Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.

Brightness

Contrast

Sharpness

Color

Tint

Color Temperature Cool

Picture Setting

: Adjust

: Select ENTER:Set

ϵ϶

Brightness

decrease

brightness

increase

brightness

Contrast decrease

contrast

increase

contrast

Sharpness makes picture

softer

makes picture

clearer

Colorbe pale color be brilliant color

Tint be reddish color be greenish

color

Color Temperature Picture Quality

Cool Bluish

StandardNeutral

WarmReddish

4After your desired setting, press EXIT/

CANCEL to return to the normal screen.

Note:

The Contrast default setting is set to maximum at the

factory.

•

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Preference”.

DNR On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode

: Adjust

: Select

3Press ϵ or ϶ to select a mode you want to

adjust.

DNR On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

Picture Preference Standard

Picture Size >>

Film Mode

: Adjust

: Select

Mode Picture Quality

Sports

Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set)

StandardStandard picture quality (factory-set)

Movie Movie-like picture setting (factory-set)

MemoryYour personal preferences (set by

you; see “Picture settings” at right).

4After your desired setting, press EXIT/

CANCEL to return to the normal screen.

TV operation

Theater Wide2 picture size (for letter box

programs)

The entire picture is uniformly enlarged—it is stretched

the same amount both wider and taller (retains its

original proportion).

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Theater Wide3 picture size (for letter box programs

with subtitles)

To fill the width of the screen, it is extended horizontally.

However; it is only slightly extended at the top and the

bottom.

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Full picture size (for 16:9 source programs)

Full will display the picture at the maximum size.

Note:

Some High Definition and/or Digital broadcasts may

not allow you to change the picture size.

In 720p or 1080i signal, only the Theater Wide2 and

Full picture size features are available.

•

1Press MENU. Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture”,

then press ϶ or ENTER.

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Picture Size”, then

press ϶ or ENTER to display Picture Size

menu. Press ϳ/ϴ or corresponding Number

button (0-4) to select the desired picture size,

as described below.

Picture Size

1.Theater Wide1

2.Theater Wide2

3.Theater Wide3

[0-4]:Select

0.Natural

4.Full

Note:

Selectable picture sizes may vary depending on the

input source or broadcast signal.

Picture Size menu also can be displayed by pressing

PIC SIZE on the remote control.

•

3Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Natural picture size

In some cases, this image will display the size of

standard 4:3 with a black side bar.

Theater Wide1 picture size (for 4:3 format

programs)

To fill the screen, the right and left edges are extended,

however; the center of the picture remains near its

former ratio.

The top and bottom edges of the picture may be hidden.

Viewing the wide-screen picture formats

You can view programs in a variety of picture sizes— Natural, Theather

Wide1, Theather Wide2, Theather Wide3 and Full.

PIC SIZE

/ /

0-4

ENTER

EXIT/CANCEL

TV operation

Film Mode/DNR

A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film Mode to “On” when

you view a DVD.

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) can reduce the roughness of the picture.

(This function is available only for analog broadcast.)

DNR

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

Film Mode

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Film Mode”.

DNR On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode On

: Adjust

: Select

3Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

DNR On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode Off

: Adjust

: Select

4Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Note:

A smoother motion may be obtained by setting the Film

Mode to “On” when you view a DVD from the DVD player

connected with ColorStream (component video) inputs.

•

1Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or

ϴ to select “Picture”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “DNR”.

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

DNR On

: Adjust

: Select

3Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Picture Preference Sports

Picture Size >>

Film Mode On

Picture

Picture Setting >>

DNR Off

: Adjust

: Select

TV operation

Selecting Stereo/Second

Audio Program (SAP)

Sound control adjustment

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select the item you want to

adjust. Then press ϵ or ϶ to adjust each

setting.

Treble

Balance

MTS Stereo

Audio Language English

Audio

: Adjust

Bass

: Select

Bass: Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the bass sound.

Treble: Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the treble

sound.

Balance: Press ϵ or ϶ to obtain an equal sound

level from both speakers.

3After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

Sound control adjustment/

Selecting Stereo/Second Audio Program (SAP)

The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature provides high-fidelity stereo sound.

MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP) containing a second

language or other audio information.

When the TV/DVD receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word “Stereo” or

“SAP” displays on-screen every time you press DISPLAY.

DISPLAY

1Press MENU in the TV mode. Press ϳ or ϴ to

select “Audio”, then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “MTS”, then press ϵ or

϶ to select “Stereo”.

Treble

Balance

MTS Stereo

Audio Language English

Audio

: Adjust

Bass

: Select

3Press EXIT/CANCEL to return to the normal

screen.

Note:

Generally you can leave your TV in stereo mode

because the TV automatically outputs the type of

sound being broadcast (stereo or mono).

If the stereo sound is noisy, select “Mono” to reduce

the noise.

•

To listen to a second audio program (SAP)

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “SAP” in step 2 above. The TV

speakers will output the second audio program instead

of normal audio.

TV operation

1Press MENU in the TV mode. Then press ϳ or

ϴ to select “Audio” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Audio Language”,

then press ϶ or ENTER to display the Audio

Language menu.

Treble

Balance

MTS Stereo

Audio Language English

Audio

Bass

: Select

ENTER:Set

Selecting the audio language

When two or more audio languages are included in a digital signal, you can

select one of the audio language. (This function is available only for digital

broadcast.)

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

0-6

3Press ϳ/ϴ or Number buttons (0-6) to select

your desired language.

Audio Language

0. English

1. Language 1

2. Language 2

3. French

4. Language 3

5. Spanish

6. No Info

[0-6]: Select

4After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

TV operation

Using the aspect feature/

Adjusting the back lighting

When the Aspect feature is set to On and the TV receives a 480i signal, the

picture size is automatically selected (as described in the following table).

The Backlight feature adjusts the screen brightness for improved picture

clarity.

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Backlight”.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select : Adjust

Aspect

3Press ϵ or ϶ to adjust the setting.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select : Adjust

Aspect

4After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

Adjusting the back lightingUsing the aspect feature

/ / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Aspect”.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select : Adjust

Aspect

3After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

Aspect ratio of signal

source

Automatic aspect size

(When Aspect is On)

4:3 Normal Natural

16:9 Full Full

4:3 Letter box Theater Wide2

Not deﬁ ned User-set mode

TV operation

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Auto Shut Off”.

Press ϵ or ϶ to select “On” or “Off”.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select

Aspect

: Adjust

3After your desired setting, press EXIT/CANCEL

to return to the normal screen.

Resetting your settingsSetting the Auto Shut Off

Setting the Auto Shut Off/

Resetting your settings

If the Auto Shut Off feature is On, a station being viewed stops broadcasting

and the TV is not operated, the TV will automatically shut itself off after 15

minutes.

The Reset function returns your settings to the factory settings. / / /

EXIT/CANCEL

ENTER

1Press MENU in the TV mode. The TV menu

screen will appear. Press ϳ or ϴ to select

“Setup” , then press ϶ or ENTER.

Picture

Audio

Channel

Lock

Setup

Main Menu

: Select ENTER:Set

2Press ϳ or ϴ to select “Reset”.

Video Label >>

Backlight

Auto Shut Off Off

Reset>>

Setup

Closed Caption >>

Language English

: Select ENTER:Set

Aspect

3Press ϶ or ENTER to return your settings to

the factory settings.

4“Reset” will appear on the screen approx. 3

seconds, then it returns to the normal

Note:

The Reset function returns your adjustments to the

following factory settings:

•

Picture Setting

Brightness ...... center (25)

Contrast ............ max (50)

Sharpness...... center (25)

Color .............. center (25)

Tint ................... center (0)

Color Temperature ... Cool

Picture Preference .... Sports

Film Mode .......................On

Bass................... center (15)

Treble ................ center (15)

Balance................ center (0)

Basic playback

Press STOP to end playback.

QResuming facility

• The unit records the stopped

point, depending on the disc.

“ ” appears on the screen.

Press PLAY to resume playback

(from the scene point).

• If you press STOP again

(“Q” appears on the TV screen.),

the unit will clear the stopped

point.

On the TV screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and

then playback commences.

DVD

VCD

Preparations:

• When connecting to other equipment, turn the power off.

1Press POWER on the unit or on the remote con-

trol to turn on the unit.

• POWER indicator on the front of the unit changes

blue. It may take approx. 10 seconds for a picture to

appear on screen.

• Every time you press POWER, the TV/DVD starts

from TV mode.

• When using an ampliﬁ er, switch on the ampliﬁ er.

2Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD

mode.

The DVD startup screen will appear on the TV screen.

3Load a disc in the disc slot.

Basic playback

• Load the disc in the disc slot with the label side fac-

ing forward. (If the disc has a label.) Hold the disc

without touching either of its surfaces, align it with

the guides, and place it in position.

• If a disc is inserted during some modes other than

DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then

playback may be begun automatically.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the

disc has a menu feature.

Press / or / on the remote control to

select title, then press ENTER. Title is selected and

play commences.

Q To start playback in the stop mode

Press PLAY.

Note:

If the unit does not operate properly:

Static electricity, etc., may affect the TV/DVD·s operation. In such

case, disconnect the AC cord, then connect it again.

Playing a disc

This section shows you the basics on how

to play a disc.

CAUTION

Keep your ﬁ ngers well clear of the disc slot when

disc is loading or unloading. Neglecting to do so

may cause serious personal injury.

Press VOLUME + or – to adjust the volume.

Reading

ENTER

PLAY

STOP

TV/DVD

/ / /

POWER

VOL +/–

Volume : 25

EJECT

STOP VOLUME +/–

PLAY

POWER

Basic playback

To pause playback (still mode)

Press PAUSE during playback.

To resume normal playback,

press PLAY.

• The sound is muted during still

mode.

To stop playback

Press STOP.

To remove the disc

Press EJECT.

Remove the disc after the disc comes

out.

Note:

• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen

according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again 760 .

• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (ie. the wrong way up), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few

minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.

• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC 51 .

• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally ﬁ xed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according

to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the

instructions supplied with the DVDs.

• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.

• Use the EJECT to unload and eject the disc.

• Do not put any objects other than discs on the disc slot. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunctions.

• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen

menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press

POWER on the remote control once the movie is completed.

• There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

To obtain a higher quality picture

Occasionally, some picture noise may appear on the TV screen while playing a

DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a

lot of information. In such case, you may reduce the Sharpness with the Picture

Setting menu 35 .

About

DVD VCD CD

The

DVD VCD CD

icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the

function described under that heading.

: You can use this function with DVD video discs.

VCD

: You can use this function with Video CDs.

: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.

DVD

VCD

Basic playback (continued)

PAUSE

STOP

PLAY

POWER

EJECT

Basic playback

Playing frame by frame

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions

Press REV or FF during playback.

REV: Fast reverse playback

FF: Fast forward playback

Each time you press REV or FF

button, the playback speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Press PAUSE during still playback.

Each time you press PAUSE, the

picture advances one frame.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

• The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

Press SLOW (REVERSE) or (FORWARD)

during playback.

Each time you press the button, the

slow-motion speed changes.

To resume normal playback

Press PLAY.

Note:

• The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

• The Video CD cannot play Reverse Slow.

Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.

Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

Playback starts from the beginning of

the current chapter or track.

When you press twice in quick successions,

playback starts from the beginning of

the preceding chapter or track.

Note:

• A “Prohibition” symbol “” may appear at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not

available on the disc, or the TV/DVD cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the

TV/DVD.

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Playing in slow-motion

Locating a chapter or track

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Note:

• The TV/DVD mutes sound during reverse and forward scan

of DVD/VCD/Audio CD discs.

• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.

SLOW /

PAUSE

PLAY

REV / FF

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.

SKIP /

Playing a disc (Continued)

Advanced playback

Press / / / to view a different part of the

frame.

You may move the frame from

the center position to UP, DOWN,

LEFT or RIGHT direction.

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to

return to a 1:1 view ( Off).

Zooming

Press ZOOM during playback.

The center part of the image will be

zoomed in.

Each press of ZOOM will change

the ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5)

and 3 (x 2.0).

Zooming/Locating desired scene

This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make

selections by switching the position of the frame.

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the

desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and

track are used to locate the desired point to playback.

To check the title/track, chapter/track and time, press DISPLAY.

Note:

•In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time

can be selected.

• In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does

not work. To turn off PBC, see page 51 .

Locating desired scene

DVD

VCD

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

Note:

• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the

zoom mode.

• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

Press JUMP during playback or stop mode.

Press or to select the “Title/Track”,

“Chap-

ter” or

“Time”

Time

Title

Chapter

Jump

Time

Title

Chapter

Jump

Time

Title

Chapter 12

Jump

DVD

VCD

• If you input a wrong number, press

EXIT/CANCEL.

• Refer to the package supplied with

the disc to check the numbers.

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

• When you change the title,

playback starts from Chapter 1 of

the selected title.

• Some discs may not work in the

above operation.

0–9

/ / /

ZOOM

EXIT/CANCEL

DISPLAY

JUMP

ENTER

Advanced playback

Press MARKER during playback.

Select the blank Marker using or .

Then press ENTER to mark the desired scene.

• Repeat this procedure to mark the

other 2 scenes.

Marking desired scenes

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.

You can resume playback from each scene.

MARKER

ENTER

Marking the scenes Returning to the scenes

Press MARKER to clear the display.

Note:

• Some discs may not work with the marking operation.

• The marking is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the

power off.

• Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to

appear.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Marker function is prohibited.

Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.

Press or to select the Marker 1-3.

Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the marked

scene.

QTo cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press EXIT/CANCEL.

EXIT/CANCEL

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

Advanced playback

Press REPEAT A-B during playback.

The start point is selected.

Press REPEAT A-B again.

The end point is selected. Playback

starts at the point that you selected.

Playback stops at the end point and

returns to Point A automatically, then

starts again.

[DVD]

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Chapter”

or “Title”.

The unit automatically starts

repeat playback after ﬁ nishing

the current title or chapter.

[Video CD]

Press to select “Repeat”.

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or

“All”.

The unit automatically starts

repeat playback after ﬁ nishing

the current track.

• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode,

press PLAY to start Repeat playback.

A-B Repeat playback

Repeat playback

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat a section between

two selected points.

Note:

• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations

may not be displayed.

• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include

multiple angles.

• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback

is activated.

• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain

scenes of the DVD.

• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and

MP3/WMA/JPEG CD.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

To resume normal playback

Press REPEAT A-B again.

“

Off

” appears on the screen.

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop

mode.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

Note:

• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat function is

prohibited during playback.

• Chapter/Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP

or is pressed.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Mode : Off

DVD

VCD

DVD

VCD

ENTER

PLAY MODE

PLAY

REPEAT A-B

SKIP /

Advanced playback

VCD

Press

to return to the left column, then

press

to select the “Program Playback”

and press ENTER.

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

• To resume normal playback,

select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

Program playback

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Note:

• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set

Program playback.

• The program is canceled when you eject the disc or turn the

power off.

QTo change the program

1. Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press

/ / /

to select the track number you want to change, then

press EXIT/CANCEL.

2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the new track

number.

QTo clear the program one by one

Select Mode to “Program”, press

/ / /

to select the

track number. Then press EXIT/CANCEL.

QTo clear all the programs

At the left column, press

to select “Clear Program”.

Then press ENTER.

Random playback

Press / to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Random”.

Press PLAY

The Random Playback will start.

Note:

• In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random

function during playback.

• The random playback is canceled when you eject the disc or

turn the power off.

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop

mode.

• If you set “Random” during playback mode,

Random playback will begin after the track that is

currently being played has ended.

• To resume normal playback,

select Mode: “Off” in step 2.

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Off

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

1 9

2 – – –

3 – – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

1 9

2 3

3 11

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Program

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Random

Press / to select the programming position.

Press

/ and then use

Number buttons (0–9)

to input the track.

•

To program others, repeat this step.

• If you input a wrong number, press

EXIT/CANCEL.

Press or to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly to select “Program”.

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks on the disc. And the

unit can also select tracks at random and playback them. These

features work for Video CD.

For Audio CD and MP3/WMA CD, please see “Random playback

(Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 55 and “Program playback (Audio

CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)” 56 .

0–9

/ / /

PLAY

EXIT/CANCEL

PLAY MODE

ENTER

VCD

Advanced playback

Changing angles

Title selection

DVD menu

Press ANGLE during playback.

The current angle will appear.

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle

is selected.

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the

angle even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Press TOP MENU during playback.

Title menu appears on the screen.

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

Press ENTER or PLAY.

The playback of the selected title will

start.

Note:

•

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.

•

Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a

“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

Press DVD MENU during playback.

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.

When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another

screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set

the item completely.

Changing angles/Title selection/

DVD menu

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume

playback from the scene point when you press DVD MENU.

Press / / / to select the desired title.

1/2

/ / /

TOP MENU

ANGLE

PLAY

DVD MENU

The DVD menu appears on the TV

screen.

• Press DVD MENU again to resume

playback at the scene when you

pressed DVD MENU.

Press / / / to select the desired item.

ENTER

Advanced playback

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until

the desired language is selected.

Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly until the

desired language is selected.

• The on screen display will disappear after a few

seconds.

Press AUDIO SELECT during playback.

The current soundtrack language will

appear.

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

Note:

• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the

button several times, the language is not recorded on

the disc.

• The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when

you eject the disc. The initial default language or

available language will be heard if the disc is played

back again.

• If you select DTS in playing DTS-encoded disc, no

sound will be heard from the TV/DVD·s speakers.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO

SELECT.

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can

select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until

“Off” appears.

• The on screen display will disappear after a

few seconds.

Note:

• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change

subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.

• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when

you loaded or eject the disc.

• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not

be changed immediately.

Subtitles

Changing soundtrack language

DVD

VCD

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

LR L R

1/5 Eng

Off

AUDIO SELECT

SUBTITLE

Advanced playback

Disc status/To turn off the PBC

DVD

VCD

Disc status

With press of DISPLAY, the status of the disc

will appear on the screen.

To cancel the display, press DISPLAY again.

DVD

DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39

Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24

1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng

1/1

DISC OPERATION ELAPSED

TIME

TOTAL

TIME

TITLE NO.

ANGLE NO.

AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

CHAPTER

NO.

Video CD

VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03

Track 3/15

DISC OPERATION

ELAPSED

TIME

TOTAL

TIME

TRACK NO.

Q To turn on the PBC

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly

until “PBC” appear.

VCD

To turn off the PBC (see 7)

Press / to select “Mode”, then press

ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appear.

Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Mode : Off

ENTER

DISPLAY

PLAY MODE

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD operation

Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information

Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its ﬁ le name must include 3-digits extension letters,

“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.jpg”.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized ﬁ les.

• This unit can read 2000 ﬁ les per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 ﬁ les, it reads up to 2000 ﬁ les, the remaining ﬁ les

will be omitted.

• MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.

• If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les, only audio tracks will be played.

• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les depending on its structure.

• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Speciﬁ cation” can be played back, the ﬁ le name is displayed (within 15 letters) on

the screen. Long ﬁ le names will be condensed.

• The music ﬁ les recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

Limitations on display

• The maximum number for display is 15 letters.

Available letters for display are the following:

capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les

To playback MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order,

1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

2. Name each ﬁ le including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG ﬁ les cannot be played back.

Standard, sampling frequency and the bit rate:

MP3 CD

MPEG-1 Audio

32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)

The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant

bit rate.

WMA CD

WMA version 7 and 8

32kHz/48kbps, 44.1kHz/48kbps~192kbps, 48kHz/128kbps~192kbps

The ﬁ le recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.

Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

This unit can playback the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/

WMA/JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied).

The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

This player requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.

There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3/WMA ﬁ les). Not all recordable

discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this owner·s manual are meant only as a

guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 ﬁ les is not recommended.

You must obtain any required permission from copyright owners to download or use copyrighted content.

Toshiba cannot and does not grant such permission.

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA and Audio CD playback

Load an Audio CD or a disc on which MP3

or WMA ﬁ les have been recorded in the disc

slot.

Aﬁ le browser screen will appear on the screen.

About ﬁ le menu

Note:

• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA

and JPEG ﬁ les, the ﬁ les are played back by selecting

them from the ﬁ le browser.

• MP3 or WMA ﬁ le on the Kodak Picture CD is not

recognized on this unit.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

JPEG Preview

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

MP3-5

MP3-6

WMA-11

WMA-12

Picture-1

Picture-2

Picture-3

Picture-4

Music Playing

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

/WMA-11.WMA

3/15 00:00:00

QSelect Files

The ﬁ le type to make it display in the ﬁ le browser can

be chosen.

1.Press or to highlight “Select Files” at right column

in the ﬁ le browser.

2. Press ENTER, then press or to select ﬁ le type

from the list (Music or Picture).

3. Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked

ﬁ le type will be displayed in the ﬁ le browser.

4. Press RETURN to save the setting.

Press / to select ﬁ le.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

/MP3-2.MP3

JPEG Preview

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Press STOP to end playback.

• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears

on the TV screen. Press PLAY to resume playback

(from the scene point).

• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit

will clear the stopped point.

Press ENTER.

The selected ﬁ le starts playing back.

/ / /

PLAY

STOP

ENTER

• In case the current directory includes more than 8

ﬁ les, press or to scroll in the ﬁ le list.

• To see contents in folder, select the folder and then

press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, press

RETURN or select “ Go Up ...” then press ENTER.

• When PLAY is pressed after the ﬁ le browser

displayed, playback begins automatically starting

from the ﬁ rst ﬁ le. In this case, if the ﬁ rst ﬁ le is an

MP3/WMA ﬁ le, only MP3/WMA ﬁ les are played

back in order. If the ﬁ rst ﬁ le is a JPEG ﬁ le, the ﬁ rst

JPEG ﬁ le is played back. If there is no ﬁ le at a root

directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Note:

• During MP3/WMA playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B

Repeat functions.

• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and

Program playback for Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG playback

55 56 .

RETURN

Advanced playback

MP3/WMA/JPEG and Audio CD

operation (Continued)

The slide show enables you to view pictures (ﬁ les) one after

another automatically.

Preparation:

• Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds”

or “15 Seconds” 59 .

Load a JPEG disc in the disc slot.

Aﬁ le browser screen

will appear on the

screen.

Press /to select the ﬁ le.

To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU.

Press / / / to select the desired ﬁ le.

(To return to the ﬁ le browser, press TOP MENU.)

Press STOP to end playback.

JPEG playback

Select your desired starting ﬁ le for the slide

show in the step 3 on left.

Press ENTER or PLAY to start slide show from

the selected ﬁ le.

Slide show playback

• When PLAY is pressed after the ﬁ le browser

displayed, playback begins automatically

starting from the ﬁ rst ﬁ le. In this case, if the

ﬁ rst ﬁ le is a JPEG ﬁ le, the ﬁ rst JPEG ﬁ le is

played back. If the ﬁ rst ﬁ le is an MP3/WMA

ﬁ le, only MP3/WMA ﬁ les are played back in

order. If there is no ﬁ le at a root directory,

playback does not begin automatically.

CD CD

Picture-01

Picture-02

Picture-03

Picture-04

Picture-05

Picture-06

Picture-07

Picture-08

JPEG Preview

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

W: 2048 H: 1536

/Picture-01.JPG

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees.

Press ANGLE during playback of the image.

“”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.

Zooming an image

Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG

ﬁ les. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming”

• If you press PAUS E during the slide show, the slide

show stops temporary. “\\” appears brieﬂ y on the TV

screen.

Press PLAY or SKIP again to resume the slide show.

•If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press

ANGLE repeatedly until it·s right side up.

“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the TV screen.

• When the slide show playback ﬁ nished, the ﬁ le list

appears.

• To stop the slide show, press STOP. The ﬁ le browser

appears.

Note:

• During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B

Repeat functions.

• When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire

image may not be displayed on a screen, preview window

or thumbnail list.

• It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.

/ / /

TOP MENU

ANGLE

PLAY

SKIP

PAUSE

STOP

ENTER

DVD MENU

Press ENTER or PLAY. The selected picture

appears on the screen.

The ﬁ le browser appears on the

screen. If you want to watch the

other ﬁ le, repeat steps 3 ~ 4.

ZOOM

Advanced playback

Repeat, random and program playback

using file browser

Press PLAY.

The random playback will start.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

CD CD

older-1

older-2

P3-1

P3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

older-1

older-2

P3-1

P3-2

MP3 3

Select Files

Repeat :Track

Mode :Off

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Random

Repeat playback (Audio CD/

MP3/WMA/JPEG)

In the ﬁ le browser, press / //to select

“Repeat” during stop mode.

Press ENTER repeatedly to select “Track” or

“All”.

Press PLAY.

The unit automatically starts repeat

playback after ﬁ nishing the current

track.

Random playback (Audio CD/

MP3/WMA/JPEG)

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

In the ﬁ le browser, press // / to select

“Mode” during stop mode.

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

To resume normal playback

Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

• The repeat function is canceled when you eject the disc

or turn the power off.

• Track repeat function is canceled whenever SKIP or

is pressed.

ENTER

PLAY

2 2

/ / /

SKIP /

Note:

• The random function is canceled when you eject the disc

or turn the power off.

Advanced playback

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Browser View

Clear Program

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-3

In the ﬁ le browser, press / / / to select

“Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

Press

/ / /

to select ﬁ le you want to

add into the program list.

Press

/ //

to select “Add To Program”.

Then press ENTER. All marked ﬁ les are added

into the program list.

When you ﬁ nish storing the ﬁ les

which you want into the Program

list, select “Edit Mode” and press

ENTER to release edit mode.

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3 3

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA 2

JPEG Previe

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Edit Mode

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA 2

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG)

Press

to select “Program View”, then press

ENTER. Program View shows only the

programmed ﬁ les that you have added in step 2.

Program View

In the Program View, press PLAY. The ﬁ les

start to playback in programed order that were

added by you.

To remove ﬁ le from program list in stop mode

In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select ﬁ le

you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear

Program” and press ENTER. Marked ﬁ le is removed

from program list.

Browser View

JPEG Preview

Edit Mode

Program View

Add To Program

Folder-1

Folder-2

MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3

WMA-1

WMA-2

WMA-3

/ / /

PLAY

ENTER

When “Edit Mode” is black

color, you can mark the ﬁ les

which you want to add into

Program list.

Press ENTER. Selected ﬁ le

was marked.

Repeat this procedure to

select the other ﬁ les.

Note:

•The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc

or turn the power off.

Repeat, random and program playback

using file browser (Continued)

Function setup

Section Option Details Page

Menu Subtitle

Audio

To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio”

if more than one language are available on the disc.

TV Screen To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.

Display To turn On or Off the operational status display on the TV screen.

Picture Mode To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.

JPEG Interval To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.

Night Mode To select On or Off for Night Mode.

Digital Out To select a digital output sound format corresponding to your

system connection.

Parental

To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.

Password To change the password.

• Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 to

change other option.

• To select another section, go

back to step 2 by pressing

repeatedly.

Customizing the function settings

You can change the default settings of the DVD mode to customize

performance to your preference.

Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select DVD mode.

Setting procedure

DVD

VCD

Press SETUP during stop mode.

The following on-screen display appears.

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP once or

press RETURN repeatedly.

Press or to select the desired section, then

press or .

First option will be highlighted. Press or

to select the desired option.

Then press or ENTER. The selectable

settings will appear.

Change the selection using or , by referring

to the corresponding pages 57 ~ 60 .

Press ENTER to save the setting.

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

Di X(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Pi t M d A t

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

TV Screen 4:3

Display

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

4:3

16:9

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

TV Screen : 16:9

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

TV Screen : 16:9

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

SETUP

/ / /

RETURN

ENTER

TV/DVD

Setting details

Function setup

Setting details

Menu, Subtitle, Audio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and

“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto

the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Other:

Other language can be selected (see “Language

code list” 65 ).

Original (Audio):

The unit will select the ﬁ rst priority language of

each disc.

Off (Subtitle):

Subtitles do not appear.

Note:

• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the

ﬁ rst-priority language is selected.

• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform

it by “Language” in the TV menu 21 .

TV Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3 (Letter box):

When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it

displays the wide picture with black bands at the

top and bottom of screen.

4:3 (Pan & scan):

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen

with left and right edges automatically cut off.

16:9 (Wide):

A wide screen picture is displayed full size.

Display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you

press any buttons.

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you

press any buttons.

On: On screen displays appear when you press

the buttons (factory setting).

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

TV Screen : 16:9

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : Off

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Note:

• If the DVD disc is not formatted in the Pan & scan style, it

will display 4:3 style.

Function setup

Picture Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures

recorded in DVD video discs: ﬁ lm content (pictures

recorded from ﬁ lms at 24 frames per second) and

video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per

second). Make this selection according to the type of

content being viewed.

Auto: Select this selection normally.

The DVD player automatically detects

source content, ﬁ lm or video of

playback source, and converts that

signal in an appropriate method.

Film: The DVD player converts ﬁ lm content

pictures appropriately. Suitable for

playback of ﬁ lm content pictures.

Video: The DVD player ﬁ lters video signal and

converts it appropriately.

Suitable for playback of video content

pictures.

Note:

• Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or

doubled. In this case, select “Video”.

JPEG Interval

You can continuously playback all JPEG ﬁ les

automatically.

After the selection below, the disc will start playback on

JPEG ﬁ les which have been recorded.

Off:

Plays back one ﬁ le at a time.

5 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

5 second intervals.

10 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

10 second intervals.

15 Seconds:

Plays back images in the form of a slide show at

15 second intervals.

Ϯ Night Mode

Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as

to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc.

On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down

slightly when played back. This is suitable when

it is connected to a stereo.

Note:

This function works only when the disc recorded with

Dolby Digital is played back.

The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD

video disc.

•

Parental : Off

Set Password

Output : Interlace

DivX(R) VOD

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Night Mode : Off

Digital Out : Bitstream

Ϯ Digital Out

You can select the digital output sound format corresponding

to your system connection.

Off:

There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

jack.

PCM:

Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.

Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo

amplifier.

Bitstream:

Disc audio bitstream data will be output.

Note:

Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output

in PCM format.

•

Function setup

DRC : Off

QSound : On

Menu : English

Subtitle : English

Audio : English

E.B.L. : Off

TV Screen : 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

Password : Change

Parental control setting

Some discs are speciﬁ ed as not suitable for children. Such

discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

1) Press or to select “Parental”, then press

ENTER. “Enter Password” screen will appear.

2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9).

(Please note, this is pre-setting password of this

unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list

will appear.

•Level Off: The parental control setting does not

function.

•Level 8:

Virtually all DVD software can be

played back.

•Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be

played back.

3) Press or to select from the level 1 to level 8.

The limitation will be more severe as the level

number is lower. Then press ENTER.

Note:

• The parental control level is equivalent to the following

USA movie ratings.

Level 1: G Level 5:

Level 2: Level 6: R

Level 3: PG Level 7: NC-17

Level 4: PG-13 Level 8:

The parental control levels for other countries/area

than U.S. are included for future use. Check the

appropriate parental control level when you buy a DVD

video disc equipped with the parental control feature

in the future.

•

Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with speciﬁ c rating

level information though its disc jacket says “adult.”

For those discs, the age restriction will not work.

• The password is required every time when you

change the parental level.

• If you input a wrong number, press EXIT/CANCEL.

Setting details (continued)

Note:

• If each setup (pages 58 ~ 60 ) has completed, the unit

can always work under the same condition (especially with

DVD discs).

Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn

the power off.

QSet the new password

1) Press or to select “Password”, then press

ENTER. “Enter Current Password” screen will

appear.

2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current

password (If the password has not been set yet

after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).

3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen

will appear. Press Number buttons (0–9) to input

the new password.

4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been

set. Be sure to remember this number!

If you forget the password

1) Press EJECT to remove the disc.

2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and

then press STOP on the unit. “Password Clear”

appears on the screen. Now the password

has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).

Customizing the function settings (Continued)

Function setup

Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).

Then press ENTER.

If the DVD disc has been designed to

temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen

which follows the “Reading” screen will

change, depending on which disc is played.

If you select “YES” with the ENTER key,

password input screen will then appear.

• If “NO” is selected, press EJECT to remove

the disc.

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level

that you have set.

It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

DVD

Load a DVD disc.

Playback will commence if the entered

password is correct.

Enter Password

To exit from the entry, press

RETURN.

0–9

RETURN

ENTER

EJECT

Note:

• This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until

the disc is ejected.

When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be

set again automatically.

Others

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

POWER

TV/DVD does not operate.

• Make sure the connection of AC cord is secured.

• Try another AC outlet.

• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.

TV BROADCAST RECEPTION

Poor sound or No sound.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check Volume adjustments or mute.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

25, 26

Poor picture or No picture.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

• Check Picture setting.

14, 15

Poor reception on some

channels.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Station signal is weak, reorient antenna to receive weaker station.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

Poor color or no color.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Check Picture setting.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

14, 15

Picture wobbles or drifts.

• Station or Cable TV may have problems, try another station.

• Make sure channels are set into memory.

• Cable TV company is scrambling signal.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

14, 15

No CATV reception.

• Check all Cable TV connections.

• Set Air/Cable selection to the Cable position.

• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.

Horizontal or diagonal bars on

screen.

• Check antenna or Cable TV connections, reorient antenna.

• Check for sources of possible interference.

14, 15

No reception above channel 13. • Make sure Air/Cable selection is in the appropriate position.

• If antenna is used, check UHF antenna connections.

TV shuts off.

• Auto shut off feature worked.

• Sleep Timer is set.

• Power interrupted.

Closed - Caption is not

activated.

• TV station experiencing problems or program tuned is not closed

captioned. Try another channel.

• Check Cable TV connection or VHF/UHF antenna, reposition or

rotate antenna.

• Set “CC Setting” to “On” to turn on the closed caption decoder.

14, 15

Display is not shown in your

language. • Select proper language in the menu options. 21

Troubleshooting

Use the following check list for troubleshooting when you have problems with your unit. Consult your local dealer or

service outlet if problems persist.

Be sure all connections are properly made when using with other units.

Understanding the Power Return feature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV/DVD and the power is resupplied, the Power Return feature will

turn the TV/DVD on automatically. If the power is going to be off for a long time or you are going to be away from the

TV/DVD for a long time, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent the TV/DVD from turning on in your

absence.

Others

SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS PAGE

DVD

Playback doesn·t start.

• No disc is loaded.

• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.

• The unit cannot play CD-ROMs, etc.

No picture. • TV/DVD selector is not set correctly. 42

No sound.

• Check the input selector of the ampliﬁ er is set properly.

• The unit is in the special playback mode.

• Select the correct Audio Input/Output position on AV ampliﬁ er.

18, 19

Picture is distorted during fast

reverse/forward playback. • The picture will be distorted occasionally. -

Stopping playback, search,

slowmotion play, repeat play, or

program play, etc. cannot be

performed.

• Some discs may not do some of the functions. -

No on-screen display. • Set Display to On. 58

The unit or remote operation key

is not functioning.

• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes,

then replug it. -

Playback does not start when

the title is selected. • Check the Parental setup. 60

Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle

language is not changed when

you playback a DVD.

• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc. 50

No subtitle. • Some discs have no subtitles.

• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.50

Angle cannot be changed. • Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc. 49

“” appears on the screen. • The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 44

REMOTE CONTROL

The remote control does not

function.

• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.

• Operate within approx. 5 meters or reduce the light in the room.

• Clear the path of the beam.

• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.

• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.

Others

GHOSTS

Ghosts are caused by the television signal following two paths. One is

the direct path and the other is reﬂ ected by tall buildings, hills or other

large objects. Changing the direction or position of the antenna may

improve the reception.

IGNITION

Black spots or horizontal streaks may appear, the picture may ﬂ utter or

drift. Usually caused by interference from automobile ignition systems,

neon lamps or AC powered tools and appliances such as drills or hair

dryers.

SNOW

If the TV/DVD is located far from the TV station, in a fringe reception

area where the signal is weak, small dots may appear in the picture.

If the signal is extremely weak, the installation of a larger external

antenna may be necessary.

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE (RFI)

Caused by two-way radios, this type of interference produces moving

ripples or diagonal streaks in the picture. Some cases may cause a

loss of contrast in the picture. Changing the direction and position of

the antenna or installing an RFI ﬁ lter may improve the picture.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

To prevent ﬁ re or shock hazard, disconnect the TV/DVD from the power source before cleaning.

Use caution when cleaning or wiping the plastic parts.

Reception disturbances

Most types of television interference can be remedied by adjusting the height and position of the VHF/UHF antenna.

Outdoor antennas are recommended for best results. The most common types of television interference are shown

below. If one of these symptoms appear when the TV/DVD is connected to a Cable TV system, the disturbance may

be caused by the local Cable TV company broadcast.

Others

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code

Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919

Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921

Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922

Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925

Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529

Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931

Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933

Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932

Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022

Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017

Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011

Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030

Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015

Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018

Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225

Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019

Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025

Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028

Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021

Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033

Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121

Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Rhaeto-Romance 2823 Urdu 3128

Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136

Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219

Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225

Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335

Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325

English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418

Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019

Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525

Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

Language code list

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 58 .

Others

Specifications

Model 15LV505

General

Power supply AC 120V 60Hz

Power consumption Operation: 35 W, Stand by: 0.8 W

Weight 7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)

Dimensions

Width: 15-13/16 inches (402 mm)

Height: 12-5/8 inches (320 mm)

Depth: 5-1/2 inches (140.1 mm)

Operating temperature 5°C-40°C (41°F-104°F)

Operating humidity Less than 80% RH (No condensation)

Television

LCD panel (Screen size is approximate.) 15-inch diagonal

Display method Color TFT LCD

Number of pixels 1366 (Horizontal) x 768 (Vertical)

Television system NTSC standard, ATSC standard (8VSB), QAM

Receiving channels

VHF: 2-13

UHF: 14-69

CATV: 1-125 (4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84)

Antenna input VHF/UHF 75 ohm

Speaker 1-3/16 x 2-13/16 inches (30.5 x 71.1 mm), 8 ohm x 2

Audio output power 1.5W + 1.5W

DVD/CD player

Signal system NTSC

Applicable disc 1. DVD (12cm, 8cm)

2. CD (12cm, 8cm)

Pickup 1-Lens, 2-Beams System

Input/Output

S-Video input (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1

ColorStream video input (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1

(PB, PR) 0.7 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 2

Video input 1.0 V (p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync., pin jack x 1

Audio input –8dBm, 50 kohm, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2

Digital audio output (Coaxial) 0.5 V (p-p), 75 ohm, pin jack x 1

Headphone ø3.5mm stereo mini jack x 1

Accessories

Remote control (SE-R0305) ................................................................................................... 1

Batteries (R03/AAA) .............................................................................................................. 2

AC cord .................................................................................................................................. 1

Owner·s manual (this booklet) ..................................................... .......................................... 1

Quick setup guide (Spanish) .................................................................................................. 1

• This model complies with the above speciﬁ cations.

• Designs and speciﬁ cations are subject to change without notice.

• This model may not be compatible with features and/or speciﬁ cations that may be added in the future.

Others

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor

TACP warrants this LCD TV/DVD Combination

and its parts against defects in materials or

workmanship for a period of one (1) year after

the date of original retail purchase. DURING

THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP·S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH

A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT

CHARGE TO YOU.

Rental Units

The warranty for LCD TV/DVD Combination rental

units begins on the date of the ﬁ rst rental or thirty

(30) days after the date of shipment to the rental

ﬁ rm, whichever comes ﬁ rst.

Commercial Units

LCD TV/DVD Combinations sold and used for

commercial purposes have a limited warranty for all

parts and labor, which warranty begins on the date

of original retail purchase and ends on the date that

is ninety (90) days thereafter.

Owner·s Manual and Product Registration Card

Read this owner·s manual thoroughly before operating

this LCD TV/DVD Combination.

Complete and mail the enclosed product registration

card or register your LCD TV/DVD Combination

online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as

possible. By registering your LCD TV/DVD

Combination you will enable TACP to bring you

new products speciﬁ cally designed to meet your

needs and help us to contact you in the unlikely

event a safety notiﬁ cation is required under the

U.S. Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to

complete and return the product registration card

does not diminish your warranty rights.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

(1) You must retain your bill of sale or provide

other proof of purchase.

(2) All warranty servicing of this LCD TV/DVD

Combination must be made by the Depot

Warranty Repair Center speciﬁ ed by the TACP

Consumer Solutions Center.

(3) The warranties from TACP are effective only

if the LCD TV/DVD Combination is purchased

and operated in the Continental U.S.A. or

Puerto Rico.

(4) Labor service charges for set installation,

setup, adjustment of customer controls, and

installation or repair of antenna systems are not

covered by this warranty. Reception problems

caused by inadequate antenna systems are

your responsibility.

(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials

or workmanship as limited above, and do not

extend to any LCD TV/DVD Combination or

parts that have been lost or discarded by you

or to damage to the LCD TV/DVD Combination

or parts caused by ﬁ res, misuse, accident,

Acts of God (such as lightning or ﬂ uctuations in

electric power), improper installation, improper

maintenance, or use in violation of instructions

furnished by TACP; use or malfunction

through simultaneous use of this LCD TV/DVD

Combination and connected equipment; or to

units that have been modiﬁ ed or had the serial

number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered

illegible.

Limited United States Warranty

LCD TV/DVD Combination - Depot Repair Warranty

Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following limited warranties to original

consumers in the United States. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION AS A GIFT FROM THE

ORIGINAL CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE

OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED

BY THESE WARRANTIES.

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED IN THE U.S.A., ARE NOT COVERED

BY THESE WARRANTIES.

A1-1

CAUTION

THIS

LCD COLOR TELEVISION

EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.

TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-

FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,

CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.

USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN

THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE.

TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.

VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT

STARE INTO BEAM.

The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.

Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the

time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.

Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode

at the time of repair.

• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.

• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.

• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.

Location of the required Marking

The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA

RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS,

21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.

PREPARATION OF SERVICING

A1-2

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING

1. KEEP THE NOTICES

As for the places which need special attentions,

they are indicated with the labels or seals on the

cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the

indications and notices in the operation manual.

3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS

2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK

There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an

electric shock while the electric current is

flowing.

The parts in this equipment have the specific

characters of incombustibility and withstand

voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is

replaced should be used the part which has

the same character.

Especially as to the important parts for safety

which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the

table of parts as a mark, the designated

parts must be used.

5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE

ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER

ASSEMBLING OR WIRING

There are parts which use the insulation

material such as a tube or tape for safety, or

which are assembled in the condition that

these do not contact with the printed board.

The inside wiring is designed not to get closer

to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts.

Therefore, put these parts in the original

positions.

PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER

SERVICING

Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which

were removed in order to service are put in the

original positions, or whether there are the

portions which are deteriorated around the

serviced places serviced or not. Check the

insulation between the antenna terminal or

external metal and the AC cord plug blades.

And be sure the safety of that.

(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)

Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.

Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn

on the TV.

Insulation resistance between the cord plug

terminals and the eternal exposure metal

[Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by

using the 500V insulation resistance meter

[Note 1].

If the insulation resistance is less than 1M

ohm, the inspection repair should be

required.

[Note 1]

If you have not the 500V insulation

resistance meter, use a Tester.

[Note 2]

External exposure metal:

4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE

LCD PANEL

Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing.

Take enough care to deal with it.

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)

1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER

The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be

found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.

2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION

You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Antenna terminal

Headphone jack

A1-3

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet,

consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and

the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manu-

facturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long

periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when

the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the

apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been

dropped.

15) Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such a vases,

shall be placed on the apparatus.

16) An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric

light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside

antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as

contact with them might be fatal.

17) Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

18) Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short

out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.

S3126A

PORTABLE CART WARNING

(symbol provided by RETAC)

A1-4

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

19) If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is

grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the

National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast

and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding

conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for

the grounding electrode.

20) When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by

the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.

21) Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to

determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.

22) Keep your fingers clear of the disc slot as it is closing. It may cause injury.

23) When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from

the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's

manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.

24) Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume

sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

ANTENNA LEAD

IN WIRE

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

GROUND

CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

S2898A

A1-5

HOW TO HANDLE THE LCD PANEL

• Do not press hard or jolt the LCD panel. It may cause the LCD panel glass to break and injury may occur.

• If the LCD panel is broken, make absolutely sure that you do not touch the liquid in the panel. This may

cause skin inflammation.

If the liquid gets in your mouth, immediately gargle and consult with your doctor. Also, if the liquid gets in

your eyes or touches your skin, consult with your doctor after rinsing for at least 15 minutes or longer in clean

water.

CONDENSATION

Moisture will form in the operating section of the player if the player is brought from cool surroundings into a

warm room or if the temperature of the room rises suddenly. When this happens, player's performance will

be impaired.

To prevent this, let the player stand in its new surroundings for about an hour before switching it on, or

make sure that the room temperature rises gradually.

Condensation may also form during the summer if the player is exposed to the breeze from an air condi-

tioner. In such cases, change the location of the player.

25) Do not allow the product to output distorted sound for an extended period of time. It may cause speaker

overheating and fire.

26) When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continu-

ously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.

27) Do not look into the opening of the disc slot or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the

laser beam. It may cause eye damage.

28) Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious

personal injury and product malfunction.

29) This reminder is provided to call the cable TV system installer's attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be con-

nected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS (CONTINUED)

A1-6

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig.

1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ When removing the DVD Deck ]

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD

MT PCB connector.

NOTE

Fig. 1

Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

Use the Lead Free solder.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the

Flux smoke away from it.

•

Short circuit using a

soldering iron.

Pick Up PCB

Remove the Back Cabinet and Angle Deck. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Slide the Belt Loading toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)

Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

Fig. 1

DVD Deck

Belt Loading

A1-7

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

Turn Unit ON.

Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.

Press and hold the “STOP” button on the top panel.

Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit.

Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.

The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.

The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE

NEC Format

Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H

No. Key Name Custom Code Key Code

1EJECT 45 BA F5

2TV/DVD 45 BC B3

3SLEEP 40 BF 15

4POWER 40 BF 12

5 1 40 BF 01

6 2 40 BF 02

7 3 40 BF 03

8 4 40 BF 04

9 5 40 BF 05

10 6 40 BF 06

11 7 40 BF 07

12 8 40 BF 08

13 9 40 BF 09

14 DISPLAY 40 BF 1C

15 0 40 BF 00

16 / JUMP 44 BB 9B

17 SUBTITLE 44 BB 87

18 CH UP 40 BF 1B

19 VOLUME + 40 BF 1A

20 AUDIO SELECT 44 BB 53

21 INPUT/ZOOM 40 BF 0F

22 CH DOWN 40 BF 1F

23 VOLUME - 40 BF 1E

24 MUTE 40 BF 10

25 PLAY MODE 40 BF 1D

26 DVD MENU 40 BF 19

27 UP 44 BB 80

28 LEFT 44 BB 51

29 ENTER 44 BB 4E

30 RIGHT 44 BB 4D

31 DOWN 44 BB 81

32 MENU/SETUP 40 BF 0E

33 EXIT/CANCEL 44 BB EF

34 PAUSE 44 BB 10

35 PLAY 44 BB 15

36 STOP 44 BB 14

37 CH RTN/|<<SKIP 40 BF 17

38 <<REV 44 BB 19

39 FF>> 44 BB 13

40 CLOSED CAPTION/SKIP>>| 40 BF 57

41 <|SLOW 45 BA 0E

42 ANGLE 44 BB 96

43 MARKER 45 BA EC

44 SLOW |> 44 BB 0D

45 TOP MENU 44 BB DF

46 RETURN 44 BB 5D

47 REPEAT A-B 44 BB 5C

48 GAME 40 BF 28

49 PICTURE SIZE 40 BF 59

29 30

40 39

44 43

911

1214

35 37

3841

4648

A1-8

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 15.6 inch / 394.9mmV

System LCD Type Color TFT LCD

Number of Pixels 1366(H) x 768(V)

View Range Left/Right 85/85 degree

Up/Down 80/80 degree

Bright Dot n=0

Zero Bright Dot Ratio ---

Color System NTSC

Speaker 2 Speaker

Position Front

Size 1.2 x 2.8 inch

Impedance 8 ohm

Sound Output Max 1.5W + 1.5W

10%(Typical) ---

G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC

Disc

DVD, CD-

DVD-R/RW (Video Format Only)

Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm

Drive DSM-2

Search speed Fwd 4 step

Actual 2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

Rev 4 step

Actual 2-45 times (DVD)

4-40 times (CD)

Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times

Actual --

Rev 1/7 -1/2 times

Actual --

G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog US System M

System Digital ATSC(8VSB)/QAM

Tuner and System 1Tuner

Receive CH Destination US (W/CABLE)

CH Coverage 2~69, 4A, A-5~A-1, A~I, J~W, W+1~W+84

Intermediate

Digital 44.00MHz

Frequency Analog Picture(FP) 45.75MHz

Sound(FS) 41.25MHz

FP-FS 4.50MHz

Preset CH No

Stereo/Dual TV Sound US-Stereo

Tuner Sound Muting Yes

G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

Output Level --

S/N Ratio (Weighted) --

Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode --

RGB Signal Output Level --

Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm

Output Level at DVD --

at TV --

Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm

S/N Ratio at DVD (Weighted) --

Harmonic Distortion --

Frequency Response : at DVD --

at Video CD --

at SVCD --

at CD --

A2-1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-5 Power Power Source AC 120V, 60Hz

DC --

Power Consumption at AC 35W at 120V 60Hz

at DC --

Stand by (at AC) 0.8W at 120V 60Hz

Energy Star Yes

Per Year -- kWh/Year

Protector Power Fuse Yes

Safety Circuit Yes

IC Protector(Micro Fuse) Yes

G-6 Regulation Safety UL(UL6500_2nd)

Radiation FCC

Laser DHHS

G-7 Temperature Operation

C ~ +40

Storage

-20

C ~ +60

Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)

G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH

G-9 Clock and Clock (Only Broadcasting data) No

Timer Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min

On Timer Program No

Off Timer Program No

Game Timer No

Wake Up Timer No

Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec

A2-2

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-10 Remote Unit RC-LT

Control Glow in Dark Remocon Yes

Remocon Format TOSHIBA

Format TOSHIBA

Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h

Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

Total Keys 49 Keys

Keys Power Yes

Eject Yes

Sleep Yes

TV/DVD Yes

1Yes

2Yes

3Yes

4Yes

5Yes

6Yes

7Yes

8Yes

9Yes

0Yes

Jump / - Yes

Display Yes

Subtitle Yes

Audio Select Yes

Input Select / Zoom Yes

Mute Yes

CH Up Yes

CH Down Yes

Vol Up Yes

Vol Down Yes

Play Mode Yes

DVD Menu Yes

Up Yes

Down Yes

Left Yes

Right Yes

Enter Yes

Menu / Setup Yes

Exit / Cancel Yes

Game Yes

Picture Size Yes

Pause Yes

Play Yes

Stop Yes

Skip+ / Closed Caption Yes

Skip- / CH Return Yes

Search+ Yes

Search- Yes

Slow+ Yes

Slow- Yes

Angle Yes

Marker Yes

Top Menu Yes

Return Yes

Closed Caption No

Repeat A-B Yes

Zoom/ Quick View No

Freeze frame No

A2-3

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-11 Features Auto Shut Off Yes

Auto Search No

Power On Memory Yes

Comb Filter Yes

3 -D

Game Position Yes

Auto Setup(Language/CH Program) Yes

Picture Setting(TV) Yes

Picture Preference Yes

Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes

Tint Yes

Sharpness Yes

Color Temperature Yes

DNR Yes

Cable Clear No

Picture Setting(PC) No

HOR Position , VER Position No

Phase, Clock No

Red, Green, Blue No

Auto Adjust No

Backlight No

Audio MTS Yes

Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes

Stable Sound No

Surround No

BBE No

SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No

Variable Audio Out No

Tuning CH Program Yes

Air/Cable Yes

ADD/DELETE Yes

Label CH Label Yes

Video Label Yes

Favorite CH No

V-Chip Yes

Type USA Type

RRT Setup

Yes

Lock Hotel Lock No

Channel Lock No

Video Lock No

Panel Lock No

Menu Language

English

French

Spanish

Closed Caption

Yes

CC Advanced

Yes

Picture Size Yes

HD Zoom Yes

Picture Scroll

Film Mode Yes

Aspect Yes

Backlight Yes

PFC(Power Factor circuit)

Freeze frame No

PIP/POP No

Direct Input Selection Yes

Digital Out Dolby Digital Yes

MPEG No

PCM No

DTS

A2-4

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

PC Monitor Input No

VGA (640x480) No

VGA (720x400) No

WVGA (848x480) No

SVGA (800x600) No

XGA (1024x768) No

WXGA (1280x768) No

WXGA (1280x720) No

WXGA (1360x768) No

SXGA (1280x1024) No

HDMI Input No

VGA (640×480) No

720×480i (4:3) No

720×480i (16:9) No

720×480p (4:3) No

720×480p (16:9) No

720×576i (4:3) No

720×576i (16:9) No

720×576p (4:3) No

720×576p (16:9) No

1280×720p No

1920×1080i No

CEC (ORION Standard) No

Deep Color No

xvYCC No

Component Input Yes

720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz)

720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz)

720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

720×576i (4:3) No

720×576i (16:9) No

720×576p (4:3) No

720×576p (16:9) No

1280×720p Yes (60Hz)

1920×1080i Yes (60Hz)

Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) No

Screw Size No

Features Video CD Playback Yes

(DVD) SVCD Playback

MP3 Playback Yes

JPEG Yes

WMA Yes

Divx Playback No

DMF Support No

Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

(MPEG) Yes

(PCM) Yes

(DTS) Yes

Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

(DTS) No

Closed Caption Yes

Screen Saver No

TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box, Pan Scan) Yes

16:9 (Wide) Yes

Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit

A2-5

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-12 Accessories Owner's Manual Language English

w/Guarantee Card Yes

Remote Control Unit Yes

Rod Antenna

Poles --

Terminal --

Loop Antenna

Terminal --

U/V Mixer

DC Car Cord (Center+)

Guarantee Card

Warning Sheet

Circuit Diagram

Antenna Change Plug

Service Facility List

Important Safeguard

Dew/AHC Caution Sheet

Quick Set-up Sheet(Spanish) Yes

Battery Yes

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

OEM Brand No

AC Adapter

AC Cord (for AC Adapter)

AC Cord Yes

AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin)

Registration Card (NDL Card) Yes

300 to 75ohm Antenna Adapter

Sheet Information (Return) Yes(USA version)

Sheet Information (HDMI) No

Cleaning Cloth No

A2-6

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-13 Interface Switch Top Power (Tact) Yes

Channel Up/Menu Up/Play Yes

Channel Down/Menu Down/Stop Yes

Volume Up/Menu > Yes

Volume Down/Menu < Yes

Menu Yes

Play No (CH+ Alternative)

Eject Yes

Skip+, Search+ No

Skip-, Search- No

Still/Pause No

Stop No (CH- Alternative)

Main Power SW No

Input Select/Enter Yes

Rear Main Power SW No

Indicator Power/Stand-By Yes (Blue / Red)

Power Wake Up No

On Timer No

Terminals Rear Video Input 1 RCA x 1

Audio Input 1 RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

S - Input 1 Yes

Video Input 2 No

Audio Input 2 No

S - Input 2 No

Video Output No

Audio Output No

Component Input 1 RCA x 3

Analog Audio RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

Component Input 2 No

Analog Audio No

HDMI Input 1 No

Analog Audio No

HDMI Input 2 No

Analog Audio No

Sub Woofer Out No

PC Monitor Input No

Analog Audio No

Digital Audio Output Coaxial

DC Jack (Center +) No

VHF/UHF Antenna Input F Type

Video Input 3 No

Audio Input 3 No

S - Input 3 No

Other Terminal Headphone

AC Inlet Yes

G-14 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 402.0 x 140.1 x 320.0

w/o Handle, Stand Approx. W x D x H (mm) 402.0 x 64.0 x 289.0

G-15 Weight Net (Approx.) 3.5kg (7.7 lbs)

Net w/o Handle, Stand (Approx.) 3.3kg (7.3 lbs)

Gross (Approx.) 5.0kg (11.0 lbs)

A2-7

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-16 Carton Master Carton No

Content --- Sets

Material --- / ---

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) ---

Description of Origin ---

Gift Box Material Double/Full Color

W/Color Photo Label No

W/Handle Yes

Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 474 x404 x 210

Description of Origin Yes

Drop Test Natural Dropping At 2 Corner / 2 Edges / 3 Surfaces

Height (cm) 80

Container Stuffing (40' container) 1551

Sets/40' container

w/Pallet No

w/Wrapping No

G-17 Material Cabinet Front PC+ABS 94V0 NON-HALOGEN

Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

Jack Panel --

PCB Non-Halogen Demand No

Eyelet Demand Yes

G-18 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of ORION

Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)

Measures for Whisker Yes

A2-8

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B1-1

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS

AND P.C. BOARDS

1-3: POWER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Sheet Pc-1 in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the Angle Lcd-R in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP501, CP2201 and CP8101).

Remove the 5 screws (2).

Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

CAUTION

Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because

the FFC cable may be damaged.

1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

Unlock the support (2).

Remove the Cover Back in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 6 screws (3).

1-2: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y, LCD PANEL AND

REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

Fig. 1-3

Power PCB

(1)

(A)

(B) (2)

(2)

(2) (2)

(2)

1-4: DIGITAL PCB AND OPERATION PCB

(Refer to Fig. 1-4)

Remove the 2 screws (1).

Remove the Sheet Pc-2 in the direction of arrow (A).

Remove the Angle Lcd-L in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP3001 and CP3002).

Remove the 4 screws (2).

Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the Shield Digital in the direction of arrow (D).

Remove the 2 screws (3).

Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (E).

CP8101

CP2201

Stand Ass'y

Fig. 1-1

(3)

(1) (1)

(3)

Cover Back

Support

(B)

(A) (2)

Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of

arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CD7005 and CP2804).

Remove the LCD PANEL in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).

Unlock the support (1).

Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

Fig. 1-2

Remocon PCB

LCD Panel (A)

(B)

CD7005 CP7601

CP2804

Front Cabinet Ass'y

Support

(C)

(1)

Sheet Pc-1

Angle Lcd-R

Fig. 1-4

(1)

(A)

Operation PCB

(D)

(B)

(2)

CP3002

Shield Digital

(3)

(E)

Sheet Pc-2

Angle Lcd-L

(1)

(2)

CP3001

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B1-2

1-5: DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

10.

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-5 using a

soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no

soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

Remove the 3 screws (1).

Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302 and CP2303).

Remove the support (2).

Remove the Cover DVD in the direction of arrow (B).

Remove the 2 screws (3).

Remove the Angle Mpeg in the direction of arrow (C).

Remove the 4 screws (4).

Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (D).

Fig. 1-5

NOTE

Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION OF

SERVICING"

Use the Lead Free solder.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing

equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke

away from it.

When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering

on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up

PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

Pick Up PCB

DVD Deck

Short circuit using a

soldering iron.

DVD MT PCB

(2)

(C)

(B)

(3)

(4)(4) (4)

Angle Mpeg (1)

(1)

(3)

(A)

CP2303

CP2302

CP2301

(1)

Support Cover DVD

(D)

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-1

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS

2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

Remove the 3 screws (1).

Unlock the 2 supports (2).

Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Sub Ass'y.

Remove the Traverse Ass'y.

Fig. 2-1-A

Insulator (R)

NOTE

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed

here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly

is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace

the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

(1)

(2)

Loader Sub Ass'y

Traverse Ass'y

(2)

Fig. 2-1-B

• Screw Torque: 2.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (1)

(1)

NOTE

1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire

on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.

Check Hook

Loader Ass'y (Bottom Side)

Check Lock Check Lock

Fig. 2-1-C

Loader Ass'y

80 ± 5mm

Check Hook

Fig. 2-1-D

Loader Ass'y (Top Side)

Check Hook Check Hook Check Hook

2-2:

Remove the Insulator (F).

Remove the Insulator (R).

Unlock the support (1).

Remove the Gear Middle.

Remove the screw (2).

Remove the Rack Feed Ass'y.

Remove the screw (3).

Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.

Remove the screw (4).

Remove the Gear Feed.

Remove the 2 screws (5).

Remove the Feed Motor.

Remove the Gear Motor.

10.

11.

12.

13.

SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/RACK

FEED ASS'Y/FEED MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)

(3)

Gear Middle

Gear Motor

Feed Motor

• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 2)

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 3)

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw 4, 5)

Switch PCB Ass'y

(2)

(4)

Rack Feed Ass'y

Gear Feed

(5)

Fig. 2-2-A

Traverse Ass'y

(5)

(1)

Insulator (R)

Insulator (F)

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

B2-2

~ FEED MOTOR ~

WHITE (4)

BROWN (3)

~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~

YELLOW (2)

GREEN (1)

Fig. 2-2-D

Switch PCB Ass'y

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.

Fig. 2-2-C

8.0 ± 0.2mm

Safety surface for pressing

of the insert.

Feed Motor

Gear Motor

NOTE

When installing the Rack Feed Ass'y, push both ends to

align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-B. Then install it.

In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value

of the Fig. 2-2-C is correct.

When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it

correctly as Fig. 2-2-D.

Manual soldering conditions

• Soldering temperature: 320 ± 20oC

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire

on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-E.

[OK] [NG]

Fig. 2-2-B

Rack Feed Ass'y

Push

When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as

shown from Fig. 2-3-A to Fig. 2-3-B.

2-3: FFC WIRE HANDLING

Do not make the folding lines except the specified

positions for the FFC.

NOTE

Traverse Ass'y

Check Hook

Fig. 2-2-E

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

Check Hook

Fold

40 ± 1mm

[ 6 pin FFC ]

Fig. 2-3-B

Printing Surface

To Pick Up PCB Printing Surface

Fold it by 90û

20 ± 1mm

[ 24 pin FFC ]

Fig. 2-3-A

30 ± 1mm

B3-1

Masking Tape

(Cotton Tape)

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

REMOVAL

Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package

IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

Fig. 3-1

NOTE

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF

FLAT PACKAGE IC

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be

careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC

leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

NOTE

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within

10 mm distance from IC leads.

Blower type IC

desoldering machine

Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering

machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)

Fig. 3-2

NOTE

Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC

can move back and forth easily after desoldering the

leads completely.

When IC starts moving back and forth easily after

desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using

tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC

desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)

Blower type IC

desoldering

machine

Fig. 3-3

Tweezers

Peel off the Masking Tape.4.

Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical

direction towards the IC pattern.

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-4

IC pattern

B3-2

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Supply soldering

from upper position

to lower position

Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads

sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.

(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)

Fig. 3-6

Soldering IronSolder

Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)

Fig. 3-7

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the

soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thin-

tip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)

Fig. 3-8

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

NOTE

When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or

repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the

bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be

damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this

case.

Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the

IC using a magnifying glass.

Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering

position and installation position of the parts around the

IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

Solder temporarily

Soldering Iron

INSTALLATION

Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the

new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder

each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)

Fig. 3-5

Solder temporarily

SERVICE MODE LIST

This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote

control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

Releasing of V-CHIP PASSWORD.

Initialization of factory TV data.

NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such

as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

Initialization of factory DVD data.

Set Key Operations

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

Remocon

Key

0 2 sec.

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum) 1 2 sec.

Standard

Time

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum) 4 2 sec.

Set

Condition

TV mode

DVD mode

(No disc)

TV mode

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.

Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.

Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum) 6 2 sec.

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum) 9 2 sec.

ALL mode

ALL mode Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.

Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT" (On-Screen Display

Adjustment).

5 2 sec. DVD Write mode.

Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

DVD mode

(No disc)

Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.

Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum) 2 sec.

ALL mode 8

DVD

Check of the firmware version.

Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

STOP 12 sec.

DVD mode

(No disc)

C-1

STOP 72 sec.

DVD mode

(No disc)

Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.

When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon.

Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.

Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

Turn off the power

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

JG176 Up-Date Disc Ref. No.

JG176

Part No.

APJG176144

Parts Name

Up-Date Disc

Remarks

Up-Date of the Firmware

C-2

F/W Ver. ADLJD8718A

Initialize: Complete

Laser drive time

DVD LD: 0Hour

CD LD : 0Hour

A D L J D 8 7 1 8 A

Fixed

Release date (Example: 2008.07.18)

Released times on the same date

A = October

B = November

C = December

Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (8) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSIONcan be checked on the screen. Total hours are

displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE:

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".

Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding.

NOTE:The each item value might be different according to each set.

Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2.

FIG. 1

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken

to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA").

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA

CHECK SUM: 403F

LCD PWR ON: 0000

SUB: DA0E783212

DTV: CA01I85291

EEPROM: J51T01PM00

Picture: pic_CA01I0003

Initial setting data check sum.

Sub Micon check version

Main Micon check version

POWER ON total hours.

= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)

+ (16 x tens digit value)

+ (ones digit value)

EEPROM check version

Parameter

NOTE: No need to set data other position than 7200~79FF.

10.

11.

12.

13.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through the ADDRESS

until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.

Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected.

Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

Turn on the Power.

Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

FIG. 2

ADDRESS DATA

INIT : 0001 0099

SUB: DA0E783212

DTV: CA01I85291

EEPROM: J51T01PM00

C-3

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

D-1

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the

circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.

CAUTION

On-Screen Display Adjustment

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the

channel button (9) on the remote control for more than

2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as

shown in Fig. 1-1.

Fig. 1-1

Use the CH. UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9)

on the remote control to select the options shown in

Fig. 1-2.

Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control to

end the adjustments.

To display the adjustment screen for TV, AV, GAME,

COMPONENT and DVD mode, press the INPUT ZOOM

button on the remote control.

Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.

To display the adjustment screen for DTV mode, select

the digital channel.

Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel

(9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

•

Use an isolation transformer when performing any

service on this chassis.

When removing a PCB or related component, after

unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire

back in its original position.

When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink,

apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat

sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the

old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to

the IC and Transistor).

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENTS

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical

adjustments.

1. Pattern Generator

03 R DRIVE (N) 14

FULL

480i

Function Step No.

2-1: WHITE BALANCE

Place the set in Aging Test for more than 20 minutes.

Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern

Generator.

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control

to set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and

contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-2 and

press the channel button (03) on the remote control to

select "R DRIVE(N)".

Press the CH. UP/DOWN button on the remote control

to select the "R DRIVE (N)", "R CUT OFF (N)",

"B DRIVE (N)", "B CUT OFF (N)", "R DRIVE (C)",

"R CUT OFF (C)", "B DRIVE (C)", "B CUT OFF (C)",

"R DRIVE (W)","R CUT OFF (W), "B DRIVE (W)" or

"B CUTOFF(W)".

Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

to whiten the R DRIVE (N), R CUT OFF (N),

B DRIVE (N), B CUT OFF (N), R DRIVE (C),

R CUT OFF (C), B DRIVE (C), B CUT OFF (C),

R DRIVE (W) ,R CUT OFF (W), B DRIVE (W) and

B CUTOFF(W) at each step tone sections equally.

Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white

color is achieved.

FUNCTION

R DRIVE(N)

R CUT OFF(N)

G DRIVE(N)

G CUT OFF(N)

B DRIVE(N)

B CUT OFF(N)

R DRIVE(C)

R CUT OFF(C)

G DRIVE(C)

G CUT OFF(C)

B DRIVE(C)

B CUT OFF(C)

R DRIVE(W)

R CUT OFF(W)

G DRIVE(W)

G CUT OFF(W)

B DRIVE(W)

B CUT OFF(W)

BAK LIGHT CENT

BAK LIGHT MAX

NO.

FUNCTION

BAK LIGHT MIN

BRIGHTNESS CENT

BRIGHTNESS MAX

BRIGHTNESS MIN

TINT

SHARP H1 MAX

SHARP H1 MIN

SHARP H2 MAX

SHARP H2 MIN

SHARP V1 MAX

SHARP V1 MIN

CONTRAST CENTER

CONTRAST MAX

CONTRAST MIN

COLOR CENTER

COLOR MAX

COLOR MIN

CONTRAST 40

Fig. 1-2

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

D-2

2-2: BRIGHT CENT

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 8~11.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

until the brightness cent step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 16~19.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 16~19.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to

the DVD mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (32) on the remote control to

select "BRIGHTNESS CENT".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the brightness cent step No. becomes "110".

Check if the picture is normal.

2-3: CONTRAST MAX

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast max step No. becomes "151".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast max step No. becomes "149".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast max step No. becomes "156".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

until the contrast max step No. becomes "126".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 20~23.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 20~23.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to

the DVD mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (43) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST MAX".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast max step No. becomes "113".

Check if the picture is normal.

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

D-3

2-4: CONTRAST CENTER

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast cent step No. becomes "112".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast cent step No. becomes "116".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

until the contrast cent step No. becomes "94".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 19~23.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 19~23.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to

the DVD mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (42) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST CENTER".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast cent step No. becomes "111".

Check if the picture is normal.

2-5: CONTRAST 40

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (RF Input)

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "142".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "141".

Check if the picture is normal.

Receive the monoscope pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the AV(Y/C) mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "148".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(480i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control

until the contrast 40 step No. becomes "120".

Check if the picture is normal.

Playback the DVD(720p) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 20~23.

Playback the DVD(1080i) disc. (COMPONENT Input)

Press the INPUT ZOOM button on the remote control to

set to the COMPONENT mode. Then perform the above

adjustments 20~23.

Playback the DVD disc. (DVD Input)

Press the TV/DVD button on the remote control to set to

the DVD mode.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast

to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and

press the channel button (50) on the remote control to

select "CONTRAST 40".

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until

the contrast 40 step No. becomes "155".

Check if the picture is normal.

2-6: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TV/AV/GAME/COMPONENT/DVD/DTV)

CVBS Y/C 480i 480p 720p 1080i 480i 480p 720p 1080i

Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No. Step No.

3R.DRIVE (N) *************

4R.CUTOFF (N) *************

G DRIVE (N)

0000000000000

G CUTOFF (N)

0000000000000

7B DRIVE (N) *************

8B CUTOFF (N) *************

9R.DRIVE (C) *************

10 R CUTOFF (C) *************

11 G DRIVE (C) 0000000000000

12 G CUTOFF (C) 0000000000000

13 B DRIVE (C) *************

14 B CUTOFF (C) *************

15 R.DRIVE (W) *************

16 R CUTOFF (W) *************

G DRIVE (W)

0000000000000

G CUTOFF (W)

0000000000000

19 B RRIVE (W) *************

20 B CUTOFF (W) *************

29 BAK LIGHT CENT 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65 65

30 BAK LIGHT MAX 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89 89

31 BAK LIGHT MIN 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

32 BRIGHT CENT 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 110 128 128 128 128

33 BRIGHT MAX 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180

34 BRIGHT MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

TINT

128 122 122 122 121 122 129 129 122 115 118 115 122

36 SHARP H1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511

37 SHARP H1 MIN 0000000000000

38 SHARP H2 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511

39 SHARP H2 MIN 0000000000000

40 SHARP V1 MAX 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511 511

41 SHARP V1 MIN 0000000000000

42 CONT CENTER *************

43 CONT MAX *************

44 CONT MIN 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

45 COLOR CENT 130 140 140 140 170 175 186 186 140 140 140 140 140

46 COLOR MAX 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255

47 COLOR MIN 0000000000000

50 CONT 40 *************

NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

COMPONENT

DVD

DTV

GAMETV

NO. FUNCTION

D-4

D-5

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL

DVD DECK

CD2001

CD2301

DVD MT PCB

CP2301

CP2303

CP2302

CP8501

CP8502

DIGITAL PCB

POWER PCB

REMOCON PCB

OPERATION PCB

CP7601 OS7601

CP2201

CP3001

SPEAKER

J4301

CP3002

CP2804

CD6203

TU5801

CP4301

J501

CD7005

J8104

J8103

J8101

J8102

CD301

CP501

CD502

J301 CP8101

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

(LCD SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

Is F501 broken?

Is there voltage at pin

6 of IC501 21V?

Is R510 broken?

Change F501.

Check IC501 and peripheral

circuit.

Change POWER PCB.

Yes

Change R510.

Yes

E-1

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE APPEARS,

BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT

APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)

Is CD301 connected?

Is there signal at pins

1 and 4 of CD301?

Is there signal at pins

2 and 4 of IC301?

Is there signal at pins

AA3 and AA4 of IC2801?

Connect CD301.

Change SP301 and SP302.

Change TU5801.

Is there signal at pins 1

and 2 of IC6551?

Is there signal at pin 6

of IC6552, IC6553?

Check IC301 and peripheral

circuit.

Check Connection of CP4301.

Check IC6551 and

peripheral circuit.

Check IC6552, IC6553 and

peripheral circuit.

Yes

Is there signal at pin

5 of TU5801? Check IC5801 and peripheral

circuit.

Yes

E-2

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

THE PICTURE DOES NOT

APPEAR

Is there signal at pins

7,9,10,12,13,22,23,25,26

and 28 of CP2804? Change V2801(PANEL).

Change DIGITAL PCB.

Does backlight shine?

Is CD2804 connected? Connected CD2804.

Is CD7005 connected ? Connected CD7005

Yes

No No

Yes

Check Q3009 and peripheral

circuit.

Is there voltage at pins 1,2,3

and 16,17 of CP2804 5V?

Is the signal pin 16

and 18 of IC7001 ?

Is the voltage at pin

20 of IC7001 12V ?

Yes

Check IC7001 and

peripheral circuit.

Check F7001.

E-3

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is setting of color

normal?

Is the color signal

received?

Is there color signal

at IC2801?

Adjust the color.

Receive the color signal.

Check IC2801 and

peripheral circuit.

Change DIGITAL PCB.

Yes

THE COLOR DOES NOT

APPEAR

Yes

E-4

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

(DVD SECTION)

DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD

PICTURE

Does this display

logo picture?

Does IC4001 gets

P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V?

Check P.CON+3.3V and

P.CON+1.8V line.

Check pins 8 and 10 of

CP8501 and peripheral circuit.

Yes

Change IC4001.

Check the disc.

Yes

Is there signal at pins 149

and 151 of IC4001?

E-5

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does this eject disc at

change DVD DECK?

Change DVD DECK.

Does OSD appear

on the screen? Is remote key set

effectively?

Yes

DISC DOES NOT EJECT

Is there signal at pins 4

and 5 of CP2302?

Check IC4001 and

peripheral circuit.

Is there signal at pins 1

and 2 of CP2302?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Yes

Check pins 138 and 139

of IC4001 and peripheral

circuit.

Change IC2301.

E-6

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does this display

"INCORRECT DISC"?

Does CD2001 connect

with CP2301 correctly?

Yes

No No

Yes

DOES NOT PLAY DVD

Does this display

reading mark?

Does disc rotate? No

Yes

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Connect CD2301.

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between

JG017 and JG018 less

than 3.3V?

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-7

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does this display

"INCORRECT DISC"?

Does CD2001 connect

with CP2301 correctly?

Yes

No No

Yes

DOES NOT PLAY CD

Does this display

reading mark?

Does disc rotate? No

Yes

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Connect CD2301.

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between

JG019 and JG018 less

than 3.3V?

Yes

Change IC4001.

E-8

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is there signal at pins

113, 114, 115 and

116 of IC4001?

Is there signal at pins 1

and 7 of IC8501?

Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501

and peripheral circuit.

Yes

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG

AUDIO

Change MAIN PCB.

Change IC4001.

Connected CD8501.

Is there signal at pin1

of CP8501?

Check line circuit IC4001

to CP8501.

Yes

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL

AUDIO

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

Does CD8501 connected?

Is there signal at pin

122 of IC4001?

E-9

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

IC4001

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

OPU

SPINDLE/

STEPING/

SLED

MOTOR

FLASH 16M

IC4007

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

DVD LOADER

DSM2

DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD

Motor Drive

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

TR+/-, FO+/-,

MOT_LD+/-,

MOT_SLED+/-

MOT_SPDL+/-

SPINDLE/SLED/

FOCUS/TRACK_PWM,

TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN

HA0~A19,

HD0~D15,

MEMCS0, RD, WR

SD_A0~A11

SD_D0~D15

LCD BLOCK

START_SW

SPDIF-134

DVD RESET

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

AUDIO AMP

IC8501

NJM4565M(TE1)

Y_VIDEO

C_VIDEO

APWM_L+/-,

APWM_R+/-

SPDL_SENS+/-

MD_DVD, MD_CD TX

ZERO

64M SDRAM

IC4005

M12L64164A-7TG

RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#,

CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS#

SD_BA0

DVD_AUDIO_R

DVD_AUDIO_L

SYS_MUTE

RESET

DAC_VIDEO_A

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

SPDIF

TIN_SW

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

F-1 F-2

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

CP501__9.LIGHT_CTL

CP501__10.INVERTER_H

D523 CP501__4,5,14.

CP501__18. POWER FAIL

D505

TRANSFORMER

T501

FEED BACK

IC505

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

REGULATOR

IC502 KIA431A-AT

C502

AC IN

CD501

J501

POWER CONTROL IC

IC501 FA5531P-A2

Vcc

GND

F501

L501

213

CP501__12.POWER_ON_H

D515

D510

INVERTER

CONTROLLER

IC7001

BD9882FV-E2

Q505

ZCD 1

OUT

SOUND AMP

IC301

LA42052-E

D518

Q501

12 CP501__3,13. AT+12V

DC-DC CONVERTER

IC503

LA5797M-TE-L-E

CP501__1.FILTER_MUTE

DRIVE

Q7005

DRIVE

Q7003

T7001

CD7005__1.HV

CD7005__7.LV

20 DRIVE

Q7004

FEED_BACK

IC7002 LM2902DR

CD7005__14.HV

1 2

CD7005__8.LV

CP501__8.P.CON+32V

F-3 F-4

5.0V

CP3001

1FILTER MUTE AT3.3V

8TUNER+30V

9LIGHT_CTL 1V

10 INVERTER_H

POWER FAIL

KEY_B

KEY_A

3.3V

1.8V

1.8V REGULATOR

IC3003

PQ035ZN1HZPH

3.3V REGULATOR

IC3009

S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

DIGITAL TUNER

TU5801

ENG36E18KRF

AUDIO Rch SW

IC6558

NJM2534V(TE2)

VDD CORE

IC3002

AL1015

LCD PANEL

V2801

M156B1-L02

VDD CORE 1V

IC3001

BD9130NV

LCD+B SW

Q3009

TPC6108(TE85L,F,M)

AUDIO Lch SW

IC6552

MM1501XNRE

AUDIO Rch SW

IC6553

MM1501XNRE

AUDIO Lch SW

IC6557

NJM2534V(TE2)

FLASH IC

IC2804

EN29LV320AB-70TCP

DDR SDRAM

IC2802

HYB18TC256160BF-3S

SCALER IC

IC2801

R8J66954BG

BTSC DEMODULATOR

IC5801

AN5832SA-E1V

POWER(DIGITAL PCB) BLOCK DIAGRAM

AUDIO ADC

IC6551

AK5358A

SUB MICON

IC6202

R5F21124FP

EEPROM

IC2805

M24256-BWMN6TP

5.0V REGULATOR

IC3007

BD7820FP-E2

AT+12V

AT+5.8V

F-5 F-6

AMP L/R

AUDIO L/R

AV 1 CVBS

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

AUDIO L

YUV AUDIO_L

AUDIO DATA

AUDIO R

TUNER AUDIO R

SIF

DIGITAL RF (IF)

ANALOG RF(CVBS)

AV1_Y

AV1_C

DVD CP3002

19 RX

7 TX

14 DVD_A_OUT_R

15 DVD_A_OUT_L SPDIF

1 SPDIF-134

16 [V]Y_VIDEO

17 [U]C_VIDEO

6 START_SW

4 DVD_RESET

2 ZERO

TUNER AUDIO L

COAXIAL

J4301

RCA-101HT(OR)

SPDIF_OUT

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC

IC5801

AN5832SA -E1V

SIGNAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

LVDS DATA/CLK

SOUND AMP IC

IC301

LA42052-E

LCD PANEL

V2801

M156B1-L02

SCALER IC

IC2801

R8J66954BG

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

J8102

RCA-341H(NI)-09

AUDIO ADC IC

IC6551

AK5358A

HEADPHONE JACK

J301

PJ-364H

SPEAKER L/R

SP301, SP302

SO308F01

S-VIDEO-IN

J8101

DIN-417HA-01

TUNER

TU5801

ENG36E18KRF

COMPONENT Y

AUDIO Rch SW IC

IC6553

MM1501XNRE

COMPONENT AUDIO IN

J8103

RCA-228H(3)NI-02

CVBS _AV_IN

J8104

RCA-341H(2)NI-06

AUDIO Rch SW IC

IC6558

NJM2534V(TE2)

AUDIO Lch SW IC

IC6557

NJM2534V(TE2)

AUDIO Lch SW IC

IC6552

MM1501XNRE

COMPONENT U

COMPONENT V

YUV AUDIO_R

DIGITAL_A_SW

IC6556

TC7PA53FU(T5L,FT)

Y SW

IC6554

MM1501XNRE

C SW

IC6555

MM1501XNRE

SUB MICON

IC6202

R5F21124FP

SW_C_IN

SW_Y_IN

F-7 F-8

CP2301_1

CP2303

C2316

C2310

C2340

C8517

C2328

C8516

CP2302

B8501

C8518

C8515

C8539

C8538

C8519

C8529 C8530

C8514

R8510

CP8501

C2302

R2304

C2303 R2303

C2307

R2323

R2329

R2320

IC2301

R2321

R2326

R2327

R2319

C8534

C8533

R8534

R8532

R8530

C8532

R8533

R8531

R8529

C8531

IC8501

R8528

C8528

C8527

R8527

R2301

C2315

C8526

C8542

C8513

C8525

C4030

C4083

C4072

B4005

B4008

C4009

C4002

C4016

C4013

C4018

C4019

R4008

C4022

C4020

C4023

C4024

C4025

R4009

B4010

R4071

B4015

R4012

X4001

C4034

W836

R4001

C4085

R4042

C4035

IC4001

C4069

R8517

R8521

R8523

R8522

B4016

B2305

R2360

B4001

C4012

C4082

B4006

D8510

C4075

C4053

R2302

C2365

C4042

C4014

C4015

C2348

C4029

C4038

C2341

C2329

R2305

C4099

C4058

CP8502

DMG097A

IC8502

B8503

B8504

C8521

R8508

R8509 R8507

B8502

C8503

C8501

L8501

R8506

C8537 C8536

C8543

C8506

C8505

L8502

C8504

C8512

R8536

R8535

R8537

R8539

R4036

R4037

R4038

R4039

W825

W824

D4003

D4002

C2301

C2305

D2304

D2303

C2304

R2357

R2358

R2339

R2307

R2313

C2306

R2328

R2310 R2337

R2330

R2325

C2360

C2357

C2358

C2359

C2319 C4076

R8516

R2353

C2321

R2349

D4005

R2342

C8541

C4026

R2352

C2330

C2323

R2350

C2339

R2308

R2338

W818

C4105

R2309

R2334

W807

R2332

R4018

R4019 R4043

C4004

R4022

C4086

C4006

R2336

R2335 R4063

R4062

C4057

C4001

R4061

R4060

C4003

C4056

R4023

C4033

R4005

R4086

R4016

C4051

C4028

C4027

R4032

R4087

R4065

R4052

R4089

R4078

R4045

R4002

R4004

C4081

R4024 C4032

R4048

C4041C4040

R4014

C4050

C4045

C4077

C4047C4046

IC4005

R4040 C4062

C4064

W860

R4054 R4053

R2333

R2341

Q2302

R2340

Q2301

R2306

R2318

C2326

C2317C2309

C2350

C2331

C4005

C4039

R2355

C4095

C4091

R4003 C4008

C4010

C4096

D4008

R4067

R2324

W841

C4021

C8520

C4036

IC4007

B4003

B4002

C4007

C4037

C4011

C4049

C4052

C4054

C4079

C4044

C4055

C4059

C4060

W813

W812

W803

W804

DMG097A

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT (TOP SIDE)

G-1 G-2

DVD MT (BOTTOM SIDE)

53 105

157

CEH420A

C3043

L3005

C3022

C3013

D3402

D3403

L3004

IC6556

C4302

R6551

R6552

J4301

C4301

R4301

Q4301

R4302

R4306

R4307

C4303

C4304

R4310

C4306

B4302

IC3007

Q3005

Q3009

W826

B3008

C3004

R3010

R3002

CP3001

IC6553

C6571

C6584

C6553

IC6552

C6570

C6579

R6581 R6584

C6581

IC6557

C6568

R6590

R6582

C6580

IC6558

CP3002

B4301

C6564

R6502

R6501 B6556

C6569

R3039

R3038

R4309

C2921

C2924 C2923

C2914

B2821 B2820

B2822

C2935

C2944

C2936

C2933

C2943

C2940

C2947

C2931

C2946

C2891

C2883

C2948

B2816

B2817

B2815

C2929 R2837

B2810

R2810

C2880

R2814

R2815

R2812

NR2811

NR2810

R2846 R2850

C2959 C2965

NR2808NR2807

NR2806

R2824

R2817

R2827

R2823

R2826

R2825

IC2801

R2800

R2830

IC2802

R2813

C2811

C2812

C2810

C2809

R2811

C2808

C2939

R2840

C2937

C2932

R5823

R2839

R2838

C5855

R5817

R5818

R5821

R5822

C5822C5821

B6553B6552

C6578

R6562

R6561

R6559 R6558

C5847

C2918

C6562

C6561

C3047

C2905

L3003

C3048

NR3602

NR3601

R2900

C2925

X2801

X2802

C2802

C2975

C2866

C2876

C2974

C2867

C2877

C2869

C2882

D3007

B3003

D3005

L3001

R3016R3018

C3027

C3026

C3024

C3029

C3031

C3056

R3009

C3016

R3008

C6559

C6555

R3007

C3023

C2806

R2806

B2800

C2800

CP2804

R2820

B6554

R5807

W854

W855

B2811

CD6203

C5819

TU5801

C6221

R5819

R5820

C5844

C5845

C5846

L5805

C2807

C5801 C5803

R6205

R6206

R6213

R6216

C6212

R6225 C6216

R6215

R6214

R6219

R6227

R6228

R6224

X6201

W807

Q6204

CP2803

CP2801

CP6201

R6223

C6205

C3049

R2852

R2851

CP4301

W827

W858

W846

W804

W802

W840

W847

W818

W817

W816

W815

W848

W849

Q3007

R3041

R3042

Q3008

Q3006

B3015

Q3010

R3040

R3035

Q3004

Q3003

B3005

B3004

D3004

Q3011

R3020

R3022 IC3002

B3006

B3007

B3017

Q3407

C3011

C3012

C3014

C3019

C3021

C3040

R3014

R3012

R3023

R3024

R3025

R3045

R3431

C6554

B6551

C3038

C3039

R3032

R3033

R3034

B3014

IC3009

C3054

C3055

D3006

C6566 C6565

C6572

C6573

IC6555

C6577

C6576

C6574_1

C6575

IC6554

C6551

C6563

C6582

R6585

R6583

C2938

C2934

R5824

R5825

C5853

C2902

C2903

C2917

C2920

C2912

C2908

C2911

C2907

C2919

C2922

C2906

C2910

C2901

C2941

C2942

C2949

C2904

C5852

W881

R2841

B2806

B2807

B2808 B2809

B2804

B2805

C2896

C2900

C2874

R2836

C2881

C2875

R2835 C2868

C2871

C2879

C2872

B2803

C2887

C2890

C2894

C2898

C2884

C2885

IC3003

C3018

R3013

R3015

R3017 R2807

R2809

C2841

C2843

C2848

C2850

C2847

C2851

C2846

C2853

C2856

C2854

C2858

C2852

C2822

C2821

C2814

C2813

C2842

C2849

C2855

C2861

C2857

C2859

C2815

C2816

R2828

R2829

R2819

R2818

NR2809

NR2805

C2913

C2909

C6556 C6560

C2950

R2872

C2951

R2873

R2874

C2926

C2927

C2957

R3005

L3002

C3015

IC6551

X6551

R6569

NR6551

C6557

R3631

R3630

R3629

R2805

R2802

NR2802

NR2803

NR2804

NR2801

R2801

IC2804

R2842

IC3001

C2945

C5811

C5812

B5801

B5803

B5802

IC5801

C5826

C5827

C5817

R5812

R5810

R5811

C5830

C5825

Q5801

Q5802

R5808

R5809

B5804

C5823

C5824R5813 C5818

C5841

C5839

C5840

C5838

C5837

C5835

C5834

C5833

C5809

C5804

C5806

C5814 L5801

R5802

R5801

R6236

Q6202 Q6201

C6209

R6210

C6218

W865

W863

R6217

R6203

R6204

D6205

IC6201

C6210

IC6202

IC2805

C2968

R2856

Q6203

Q3002Q3001

R5804

R5803

C6215 C6213

C5805

C3006

R3019

D5803

D5804

W878

W809

W856

W857 C3065

B3023

C3066

B3022

R3044

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

G-3 G-4

DIGITAL (TOP SIDE)

DIGITAL (BOTTOM SIDE)

AA1 AA21

A21

A1 A9

R1 R9

J501

FH501

FH502

F501

R503

R509

D504

C506

W810

W808

C517

IC501

Q501

D510

D508

D518

D507

B501

IC502

C522

W010

Q503

R510

L501

C507

C508

C510

T501

R501

C7030

C7033

W013

T7001

CD7005

C7017

C7018

R7038

R7039

R7011

R7014

W001

D512

R512

R508

C518

D511

C516

R511

J8104

J8103

J8101

J8102

J301

CD301

R308

R309

W845

W806

C304

C307

IC301

C310

C311

HS301

D515

D523

C525

R549

R504

D514

C504

C514

D7007

D7008

W026 W022

R518

D516

C520

D517

R529

L504

C512

C535_1

W018

C511

C7602

CP7601

W835

W012W011

W008

CP2201

SW2203

SW2204

SW2208

SW2202

SW2207

SW2205

SW2206

SW2201

C502

R505

W015

W807

D7006

R7036

D7003

R7035

CP501

D505

W828

R521

W023

W024

R8110

W002

W017

W832

W025

W819

CD502

C513

OS7601

TH501

D526

W014

W021

W833

SH501

R7033

W004

W007

W840

IC505

W824

W827 W803

W006

R7047

W823

C309

W820

D7001

D7002

D7004

D7005

D7015

CP8101

D7601_1

L503

W019

W809

W830

W822

HS501_1

HS502_1

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

SOLDER SIDE

DED020A

SW2

CD2301

M2602 M2601

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (INSERTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

G-5 G-6

CEH423A

CEH422A

CEH421A

RISK OF FIRE

-REPLACE

AS MARKED.

R544

R545

R546

R547

R506

R517

R525

R519

C521

R515

IC503

C531

R533

R536

R543

C538

C539D521

D522

C546

D519

D520

C545

R523

C543_1

C7032

D7018

R524

C526

D7019

D7023

D7024

R7046

D7020

R7045

D7013

C7031

D7014 D7017

C7026

C7022

IC7002

R7034

C7015

R7040

C7006 R7041

C7024

C7021

R7042

C7007

C7002

IC7001

C7003

R7013

R7007

R7010

C7004

R7012

R7009

Q7003

R7056

R7026

R7025

R7021

C7013

R7023

R7024

F7001

C505

R513

C509

C8107

C8111

C8106

C8104

C8108

R8106

C8102

R8103

R8104

C8109

R8107

R8108

C8110

C8105

R8105

C8103

C320

C303

C305

C308

R304

R305

C306

C301

C319

R307

R306

R302

D509

C501

C503

R7049

R7050

C7035

R7054

R7022

C7019

C7001

C7008

C7009

R7005

R7008

Q7002

R7016

R7015

C7012

C7011

R7020

Q505

R531

Q7001

R7602

R7605

R2203 R2202

R2206 R2204

R2205

R2201

D506

R507

R502

C7010

R7019

R7017

R7003

R7002

R7001

R535

R538

R7032 R7030

R7018

R7006

R7004

Q504

R8117

R8116

R8115

R8114

R8113

R8111

R8112

R8118

R8119

R8120

Q7004 Q7005

R7044

D7012

D7011

R7048

C7020

R7043

D7010

R310

R311

R7604_1

R7603_1

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON (CHIP MOUNTED PARTS)

SOLDER SIDE

G-7 G-8

CEH423A

CEH422A

CEH421A

ABC D E F GH

C4083

1006.3V SJV

C4030

2206.3V SJV

IC4001

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP IC

101102103104

105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156

157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208

110

100

111213141516171819 22021222324

2526272829 3

30313233343536373839 4

40414243444546474849 5

5152

53 54 55 56 57 58 59

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

D4003 MA111

D4002 MA111

D4008 MA111

D4005

MA111

C4028 0.1 F

C4027 0.01 B

C4051 0.1 F

C4081 0.1 F

C4032 0.001 B

C4034 27P CH

C4035 27P CH

C4096 0.001 B

C4005 56P CH

C4079 0.001 B

C4091 100P CH

C4077 0.1 F

C4012

0.01 B

C4026 0.1 F

C4018 0.1 F

C4020 0.1 F

C4023 0.1 F

C4024 0.1 F

C4025 0.1 F

C4082

0.1 F

C4019 0.1 F

C4022 0.01 B

C4029 100P CH

C4013 0.1 F

C4016 0.1 F

C4014 0.1 F

C4008 0.1 F

C4010 0.1 F

C4055 0.001 B

C4004 0.1 F

C4033

0.1 F

C4007 0.1 F

C4049 68P CH

C4052 68P CH

C4054 68P CH

C4075 0.1 F

C4021 0.1 F

C4072 0.1 F

C4076 0.1 F

C4056 0.027 B

C4003 0.027 B

C4001 0.0039 B

C4057 180P CH

C4042

0.1 F

C4086 0.001 B

C4006 0.01 B

C4058 0.001 B

C4085 0.001 B

C4037 100P CH

C4011 100P CH

C4053

0.001 B

C4044

100P CH

C4038 0.01 B

C4105 10P CH

C4059 560PCH

C4002 0.1 F

C4015 0.1 F

C4069

476.3V

SJV

R4003

75 +-1%

R4042 100

R4012

R4071 150

R4054

R4053

R4008 47

R4065 4.7K

R4087 4.7K

R4032 4.7K

R4052 4.7K

R4078 4.7K

R4089 4.7K

R4022 15K+-1% R4043 390 +-1%

R4014 4.7K

R4001 390 +-1%

R4086

75 +-1%

R4005

75 +-1%

R4004

75 +-1%

R4002

75 +-1%

R4023

4.7K

R4009

R4019 4.7K

R4018 4.7K

R4016 100

R4067 10K

R4045 4.7K

R4036 4.7K

R4037 4.7K

R4038 4.7K

R4039 4.7K

R4024 4.7K

R4062 39K

R4063 15K

R4060 11K

R4061 11K

B4016

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4010

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4001

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4002 EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4003 EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4005 EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4006

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4015

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

W836

W841

W807

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

JG029

JG002

JG003

JG004

JG005

JG007

JG008

JG009

JG001

JG006

TP4010

X4001

100GT02727

27MHz

CD_LD

MD_CD

OPU_F

OPU_E

OPU_D

OPU_C

OPU_B

OPU_A

DVD_LD

MD_DVD

SLED_PWM

TRACK_PWM

FOCUS_PWM

SPDL_SENS+

SPDL_SENS-

SPINDLE_PWM

BOOT2

BOOT1

TACT_OFFSET

FACT_OFFSET

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

DUPTD0

DUPRD0

P.CON+5V_D

RFINN

RFINP

VDDAFERF

HD9

HD1

HD8

HD0

HA0

MEMCS0

+1.8V P.CON+3.3V_D VDDPWM3.3V

+3.3V TIN TIN_SW

TRAY_OPEN

TRAY_CLOSE

GND

+3.3V GND

HA0 HD2 HOME

HA1 HD10 DAC_VIDEO_C/D TOUT_SW

HA2 HD3 DVD_CD

HA3 DAC_VIDEO_D

HD11 DRVSB

HA4 DAC_VIDEO_A RF

HA5 HD4 OPU_A

HA6 HD12 OPU_B

HA7 HD5 OPU_C

HA8 HD13 OPU_D

HA9 OPU_E

HA10 HD6 OPU_F

HA11 HD14 VC

HA12 SPDL_SENS-

HA13 HD7 SPDL_SENS+

HA14 MD_DVD

HA15 HD15 MD_CD

HA16 DVD_LD

HA17 RESET CD_LD

HA18 HA16 SPINDLE_PWM

HA19 SLED_PWM

TRACK_PWM

HD0 HA15 DUPRD1 FOCUS_PWM

HD1 HA14 DUPTD1

HD2 HA13 DUPRD0

HD3

HD4 HA12 DUPTD0

HD5 HA11

HD6 HA10 IRRCV

HD7 HA9

HD8

HD9 HA8

HD10 WR

HD11 HA18

HD12 TIN

HA17

HD13

HD14 HA7 DVD_CD

HD15 HA6 DRVSB

TOUT_SW

MEMCS0 TRAY_CLOSE

HA5

RD GND

TRAY_OPEN

WR HA4 GND

SD_A0 SYS_MUTE

HA3 HOME

SD_A1 DAC_VIDEO_A

SPDIF

SD_A2 DAC_VIDEO_C/D

HA2

SD_A3 RESET

SD_A4 HA1 SPDIF

SD_A5 DUPRD1

HA19

SD_A6 DUPTD1

SD_A7 APWM_L+

SD_A8 APWM_L-

SD_A9 APWM_L- APWM_R+

SD_A10 APWM_R-

APWM_L+

SD_A11 P.CON+3.3V_D

SD_A4 APWM_R-

SD_D0 P.CON+5V_D

SD_A3 APWM_R+

SD_D1 P.CON+1.8V_D

SD_D2 SD_A5

SD_D3

SD_D4

SD_D5 SD_A2

SD_D6

SD_D7 SD_A6

SD_D8 SD_A1

SD_D9 SD_A7

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_BA0

RAMDQM

RAMWE#

RAMCLK

RAMCKE

SYS_MUTE

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1#

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

SD_A10

SD_A11

SD_BA0

RAMWE#

RAMDQM

RAMCLK

SD_D10

SD_D11

SD_D12

SD_D13

SD_D14

SD_D15

RAMCKE

SD_A0

SD_A8

SD_A9

SD_D8

SD_D7

SD_D9

SD_D6

SD_D5

SD_D4

SD_D3

SD_D2

SD_D1

SD_D0

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

FROM/TO MEMORY

H-2H-1

(DVD MT PCB)

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

PCB130

DMG097

NCNC

BOOTSEL2

BOOTSEL1

SGND

GNDDACBS2

RFN

RFP

158

159

160

157

53 RAMADD(0)

RAMADD(8)

RAMADD(10)

VDDP

105 VDDAPWM

106 GPIO(19)/PWMCO(5)/APWM4+

107 GPIO(20)/APWM4-

108 GPIO(21)/APWM3+

109 GPIO(22)/AOUT(3)/APWM3-

103

102

101

100 APWM6+/GPIO(14)

APWM6-/GPIO(15)

APWM5+/GPIO(16)

APWM5-/GPIO(17)

104 AIN/SPDIFIN/GPIO(18)

110 GNDAPWM

111 IGPIO(23)/APWM2+

112

113

GPIO(24)/AOUT(2)/APWM2-

GPIO(25)/APWM1+

206

205

207

208

204

203

202 MEMCS0#

MEMRD#

MEMDAT(0)

GPIO(8)/MEMDAT(8)

MEMDAT(1)

GPIO(9)/MEMDAT(9)

VDDP VDD1AFE

MEMDAT(4)

MEMDAT(11)/GPIO(1)

MEMDAT(10)/GPIO(0)

MEMDAT(3)

MEMDAT(12)/GPIO(2)

MEMDAT(5)

MEMDAT(13)/GPIO(3)

MEMDAT(6)

MEMDAT(14)/GPIO(4)

GNDC

MEMDAT(7)

MEMDAT(15)

VDDC

VDDP

MEMADD(16)

MEMCS1#/GPIO(5)

MEMADD(15)

MEMADD(14)

MEMADD(13)

MEMADD(12)

MEMADD(11)

MEMADD(10)

MEMADD(9)

MEMADD(8)

MEMWR#

MEMADD(18)/GPIO(6)

MEMADD(17)

MEMADD(7)

MEMADD(6)

GNDC

VDDP

MEMADD(5)

MEMADD(4)

MEMADD(3)

MEMADD(2)

MEMADD(1)

MEMADD(19)/IGPIO(7)

USBVDD

USBDP/GPO(67)

USBDN/GPO(68)

USBGND

RAMADD(4)

RAMADD(3)

RAMADD(5)

VDDIP

GNDC

RAMADD(2)

RAMADD(6)

RAMADD(1)

RAMADD(7)

VDDC

GNDC

RAMADD(11)/GPO(64)

RAMADD(9)

RAMBA

RAMCS1#/GPO(65)

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS#

VDDP

RAMWE#

RAMCS0#

GNDC

RAMDQM

GNDPCLK

PCLK

VDDPCLK

RAMDAT(8)

RAMDAT(7)

RAMDAT(9)

RAMDAT(6)

VDDP

GNDC

RAMDAT(10)

RAMDAT(5)

RAMDAT(11)

RAMDAT(4)

RAMDAT(12)

RAMDAT(3)

VDDP

GNDC

RAMDAT(13)

RAMDAT(2)

VDDC

RAMDAT(14)

RAMDAT(1)

RAMDAT(15)

RAMDAT(0)

VDDP

RAMDQM2/RAMCKE/GPO(66)

GNDC

RAMCKE/SDI_PSC/GPIO(10)

GPAIO/IGPIO(11)

APWM7+/GPIO(12)

APWM7-/GPIO(13)

GPIO(41)/TDI/NMI SSCRXD

GPIO(40)

GPIO(39)

GPIO(38)

IGPIO(37)/TMS/NMI

GPIO(36)

GPIO(35)

GPIO(29)/AMCLK

VDDP

GPIO(30)/ALRCLK

GPIO(31)/ABCLK

GPIO(32)/SPDIFO

GPIO(33)/AIN/SPDIFIN

GPIO(34)/RAMCKE/SPDIFIN

GNDC

GPIO(28)/AOUT(0)/APWM0-

GPIO(27)/APWM0+

GPIO(26)/AOUT(1)/APWM1-

GPIO(42)/TCK SSCCLK

GPIO(43)/TDO SSCTXD

IGPIO(44)

VDDP

GPIO(45)/PWMCO(5)/DUPTD0

GPIO(46)/DUPRD0

GPIO(47)/DUPTD1

GPIO(48)/DUPRD1

VDDC

GNDC

RESET#

GNDPLL

VDDPLL

XIN

DAC5

GNDDAC_D

DAC4

VDDDAC

DAC3

DAC2

VDDDAC

DAC1

RSET

IGPIO(55)/FCU_IRQ

GPIO(56)/FCU_RST

GPIO(57)/FCU_WAIT#

GPIO(58)/FCU_CS3#

GPIO(59)/FCU_CS2#

GPIO(60)/FCU_SCLK

GPIO(61)/FCU_IOWR#

GPIO(62)/FCU_IORD#

GPIO(63)/MEMCS2#

MEMADD(0)

CD_LD

DVD_LD

VDDPWM

GNDPWM

VDDC

GNDC

GPIO(49)/PWMCO(0)

GPIO(50)/PWMCO(1)

GPIO(51)/PWMCO(2)

GPIO(52)/PWMCO(3)

GPIO(53)/PWMCO(4)

IGPIO(54)/PWMCO(5)

GNDAFE

GND1AFE

VREF

GNDREF

VDDSAFE

CD_MD

DVD_MD

VDDAFE

MEMDAT(2)

RESLOAD

NC NC

3.3

1.9

1.5

2.9

2.4

NC 0

3.3

1.8

1.7

1.0

1.6

3.3

1.8

2.4

3.3

0.9

1.7

2.1

2.7

2.1

2.3

2.2

2.3

3.3

2.3

3.3

1.6

1.3

3.3

1.2

3.3

1.1

1.4

1.6

1.8

3.3

1.6

3.3

1.6

3.3

1.00

3.30

3.3

3.30

3.3

1.90

0.5

3.3

1.8

1.3

1.2

3.30

1.0

1.2

2.3

1.7

1.8

2.2

3.30

1.7

0.8

1.8

1.2

1.3

3.3

3.30

1.0

03.3

2.4

2.2

1.7

2.0

2.2

1.2

1.9

1.50

2.5

1.9

1.8

3.3

2.5

3.3

0.7

0.6

1.0

2.5

0.7

1.0

2.4

3.30

2.8

1.70

1.7

3.3

1.0

2.60

3.3

1.6

3.30

0.7

1.6

1.2

1.6

1.8

104PIN FPCSTRB

FOR PLAYER

94PIN STBY_L

FOR PLAYER

VDDDAC

(VR_DVD)

(VR_CD)

(10mA)

Y/C

YUV W806

W807

(AFEGND) (RF_GND)

(185mA)

(120mA)

(21mA)

(130mA)

(250mA)

DEBUG MODE DEL

RELEASE MODE ADD

VDDPWM

W836 adjust

X’tal frequrcy

(MUTE-L)

(DVD-L/CD-H)

1.8

(D_GND)

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

(RF_GND)

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

(A_GND)

NC NCNC

IAMCLK

IALRCLK

IABCLK

(D1_2)

(D1_1)

(P-H/I-L)

(MD)

(MC)

(ML)

(I2CDAT)

(I2CCLK)

V_SW

5V TOLERANT

ABC D E F GH

IC4007 SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

FLASH IC 16M

110111213141516171819 22021222324

25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

56789

IC4005 M12L64164A-7TG

64M SDRAM IC

110111213141516171819 22021222324252627

28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

50 51 52 53 54

6789

C4095

C4062

0.1 F

C4064

0.1 F

C4045

0.1 F

C4046

0.1 F

C4047

0.1 F

C4050

0.01 B

C4040

0.01 B

C4041

0.01 B

C4039

0.1 F

C4060 330P CH

C4099

0.01 B

C4036

0.001 B

C4009

2206.3V SJV

R4040

4.7K

R4048

4.7K

B4008

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

W860

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

SD_A0

SD_A1

SD_A2

SD_A3

SD_A4

SD_A5 HA16 HA15

SD_A6

SD_A7

SD_A8 HA14

SD_A9

SD_A10

SD_A11 HA13

SD_D0

SD_D1

SD_D2 HD15 HA12

SD_D3 SD_D15 SD_D0

SD_D4

SD_D5 HD7 HA11

SD_D6

SD_D7 SD_D14 SD_D1

SD_D8 HD14 HA10

SD_D9 SD_D13 SD_D2

SD_D10

SD_D11 HD6 HA9

SD_D12

SD_D13 SD_D12 SD_D3

SD_D14 HD13 HA8

SD_D15 SD_D11 SD_D4

RAMCS0#

RAMCS1# HD5 HA19

RAMRAS#

RAMCAS# SD_D10 SD_D5

SD_BA0 HD12

RAMDQM SD_D9 SD_D6

RAMWE#

RAMCLK HD4 WR

RAMCKE SD_D8 SD_D7

RESET

HA0

HA1 HD11 RAMDQM

HA2

HA3 RAMDQM RAMWE#

HA4 HD3

HA5 RAMCLK RAMCAS#

HA6

HA7 HD10 HA19 RAMRAS#

HA8

HA9 RAMCS1#

HA10 HD2 HA18

HA11 SD_A11 SD_BA0

HA12

HA13 HD9 HA17 SD_A9 RAMCS0#

HA14

HA15 SD_A8 SD_A10

HA16 HD1 HA7

HA17 SD_A7 SD_A0

HA18

HA19 HD8 HA6 SD_A6 SD_A1

HD0

HD1 SD_A5 SD_A2

HD2 HD0 HA5

HD3 SD_A4 SD_A3

HD4

HD5 RD HA4

HD6

HD7 RAMCKE

HD8 HA3

HD9

HD10

HD11 MEMCS0 HA2

HD12

HD13

HD14 HA0 HA1

HD15

MEMCS0

+3.3V

RESET

P.CON+3.3V_D

GND

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

H-4

H-3

PCB130

DMG097

(DVD MT PCB)

MEMORY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

D_GND

A16

VSS

DQ15

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

DQ5

DQ12

VDD

DQ11

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

DE#

VSS

CE#

DQ4

3.3

1.7

2.5

VCCQ

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A18

A17

A10

A19

A20

RP#

VPP

WP#

A19 0

3.3

WE#

2.5

1.9

2.5

1.5

1.9

1.2

2.2

2.0

1.7

2.2

0.7

0.6

1.0

0.7

1.0

2.4

3.3

2.8

1.7

1.0

2.6

2.2

2.4

1.9

1.5

2.9

2.4

VDD

DQ0

VDDQ

DQ1

DQ2

VSSQ

DQ3

DQ4

VDDQ

DQ5

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ7

VDD

LDQM

CAS

RAS

BA0

BA1

A10/AP

VDD

VSS

DQ15

VSSQ

DQ14

DQ13

VDDQ

DQ12

DQ11

VSSQ

DQ10

DQ9

VDDQ

DQ8

VSS

UDQM

CLK

CKE

A11

VSS

1.2

3.3

1.3

3.3

1.2

1.7

1.8

2.3

1.0

1.2

1.8

0.5

1.3

1.2

0.8

2.2

1.7

1.2

1.9

3.3

1.0

1.2

0.7

1.6

ABC D E F GH

Q2302

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

CD LD CTL

Q2301

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

DVD LD CTL

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

CP2301_1

LD07T2-24ND-03

CP2303

04_6232_106_015_800+

IC2301 LA6565VR-TLM-E

MOTOR DRIVE IC

1 1011121314151617 18 192 20 21 22

23242526272829

30313233343536373839

4041424344

56789

CP2302

04_6232_105_015_800+

D2303

MA111

D2304

MA111

C2307 0.1 B

C2306 0.1 F

C2323

0.1 B

C2317

0.1 F

C2319

100PCH

C2339

100P CH

C2315

0.1 F

C2301

0.1 F

C2365 0.1 B

C2309

0.1 F

C2331 0.1 B

C2348 0.1 B

C2350

0.1 B

C2330

10P CH

C2360

100P CH

C2359

100PCH

C2358

100P CH

C2357

100PCH

C2304

0.022 B

C2305

0.1 B

C2321

100P CH

C2303 0.1 B

C2302 0.1 B

C2326

0.1 F

C2310

10016V SJV

C2316

476.3V SJV

C2328

226.3V SJV

C2329

226.3V SJV

C2341

476.3V SJV

C2340

476.3V SJV

R2319

33K

R2321

15K

R2337

10K

R2320

4.7K

R2310

4.7K

R2324

R2309

100 +-1%

R2330

R2326

5.6K

R2327

4.7K

R2313

4.7K

R2334

10K

R2358

120

R2323

1.2

R2329

1.2

R2355

3.3K

R2342

4.7K

R2352

100

R2353

100

R2360

R2340

6.8

R2333

220

R2332

220

R2318

6.8

R2306

6.8

R2338

4.7K

R2301

R2307

75K

R2328

4.7K

R2302 100 +-1%

R2325

6.8K

R2349

100

R2336

390

R2339

1.2K

R2357 1K

R2335

3.3K

R2350

4.7K

R2341

6.8

R2304 2.2

R2303 2.2

R2305

27K

R2308

10K

B2305

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

W803

W813 W812

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

JG056

TP2320

TP2317

TP2319

TP2318

JG057

JG058

TP2313

TP2315

TP2314

JG018JG017

JG034

JG035

JG037

JG036

JG014

JG013

JG040

JG025

JG016

JG011

JG010

JG015

JG012

JG027

JG026

TP2310

TP2311

TP2312

TP2309

JG019

TP2316

TP2322

TP2302

TP2301

TP2305

TP2303

TP2304

TP2306

TP2307

TP2308

DVD_CD

MD_DVD

MD_CD

DVD_LD

CD_LD

DVD_CD

DVD_LD

OPU_F CD_LD

OPU_VREF GND

GND

OPU_E OPU_A

OPU_D OPU_B

OPU_C OPU_C

OPU_D

DVD_CD OPU_E

RF OPU_F

OPU_B HOME

P.CON+A5V_D

OPU_A TOUT_SW

DVD/VR TIN_SW

P.CON+3.3V_D MD_DVD

MD_CD

VDDPWM3.3V

DRVSB

CDLD SPINDLE_PWM

FOCUS_PWM FOCUS_PWM

TRACK_PWM

DVDLD TRACK_PWM

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

SLED_PWM

TR+ SPDL_SENS+

TR- SPDL_SENS-

FO+

FO-

DVDLD

CDLD

TIN_SW TIN_SW

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

TOUT_SW GND

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

MOT_LD-

MOT_LD+

P.CON+3.3V_D

HOME

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SPDL+

TRAY_CLOSE

TRAY_OPEN

MOT_SPDL+

MOT_SPDL-

MOT_SLED-

MOT_SLED+

MOT_LD-

MOT_LD+

TR+

TR-

FO+

FO-

DSM2(06SD)

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

H-6

H-5

PCB130

DMG097

0NC

00NCNCNCNCNC

MOTOR DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

VC2

FWD

REV

VCC2

VLD-

VLD+

VD4+

VD4-

VD3+

VD3-

VD2+

VD2-

VD1-

VD1+

VCC1

VCCS

VIN1+A

VIN1-A

VIN 1

VO_OP

VIN3

VIN3-

VIN2

VIN2-

VIN2+

VIN-OP

VIN+OP

REG-IN

REG-OUT

VREF-OUT

VREF-IN

VIN4

VIN4-

MUTE234

MUTE1

VCONT

S-GND

PGND1

PGND2

0 0 6.0 0 1.9 1.9 2.6 2.7 2.6 2.8 0 0 3.7 1.7 2.6 2.7 6.0 6.0 1.6 1.6 1.6

01.61.61.801.61.60001.601.61.601.63.23.24.10

RF_A5V

NCNC

SP1-

SP1+

SLD+

SLD-

LIMIT SW

SW(GND)

LD-

LD+

OPEN

GND(D)

(VR_DVD)

(VR_CD)

1.9

3.0

2.6

2.3

F RTN

T RTN

T DRV

F DRV

GND

VR(CD)

VR COM

VR(DVD)

LD(DVD)

LD(CD)

PD/GND

GND

Vref

VCC

SW1(DVD/CD)

VRF(RF_OUT)

FROM/TO LOADER

(D_GND)

3.2

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

(RF_GND) (RF_GND)

(D_GND) (D_GND)

(DVD MT PCB)

ABC D E F GH

IC8501

NJM4565M(TE1)

AUDIO_AMP IC

1234

5678

L8502

1uHNLV25

IC8502

LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

1.8V REG IC

123

CP8502

A2001WV2-8P

CP8501

A2001WR-14A

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

D8510

MA111

C8504

150P CH

C8506

150P CH

C8505

12P CH

C8539

0.001 B

C8519

0.001 B

C8537

560PCH

C8536

560PCH

C8543

0.01 B

C8503

0.1 B

C8518

0.001 B

C8515

0.1 B

C8531

47P CH

C8529

0.0012 B

C8528

150P CH

C8526

0.1 B

C8532

47P CH

C8530

0.0012 B

C8514

0.1 B

C8527

150P CH

C8520

2.2 B

C8538

0.001 B

C8541

0.01 B

C8542

0.01 B

C8521

0.1 B

C8512

150P CH

C8501

C8517

10016V SJV

C8525

4716V SJV

C8513

4716V SJV

C8534

1016V SJV

C8533

1016V SJV

C8516

1006.3V SJV

R8536

R8535

10K

R8529

2.2K R8531

47K

R8533

15K

R8510

24K

R8522

47K

R8523

47K

R8528

47K

R8521

47K

R8506

220

R8539

R8537

10K

R8532

47K

R8517

47K

R8530

2.2K

R8534

15K

R8516

10K

R8527

47K

R8507

1K+-1%

R8509

68 +-1%

R8508

2.2K +-1%

B8501

BLM18PG121SN1D

B8503

BLM18PG121SN1D

B8504

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B8502

EBMS160808A102_RDC45

W824

W825

W804

W818

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DURING PLAYBACK.

MEASURED WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE EACH PART WAS

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

P.CON+5V_D

DAC_VIDEO_C/D DAC_C[U]C_VIDEO P.CON+A5V_D

DAC_VIDEO_A

RESET

SYS_MUTE

DUPRD1

SPDIF

DUPTD1

APWM_L+

APWM_L-

APWM_R+

APWM_R-

P.CON+1.8V_D P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+5V_D

GND

P.CON+1.8V_D

RESET

P.CON+3.3V_D DAC_A[Y]_VIDEO

GND

P.CON+A5V_D

P.CON+3.3V_D

P.CON+6V_D

M_GND

TIN_SW

GND

APWM_L-

DUPTD1

DUPRD1

APWM_L+ TIN_SW

RESET

SYS_MUTE

SPDIF

APWM_R+

APWM_R-

(CP3002)

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FROM/TO MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

FROM/TO MEMORY

FROM/TO MOTOR DRIVE

PCB130

DMG097

H-8H-7

(A_GND)

(D_GND)

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

A_GND

VCC

4.3 4.3 6.9

4.3 4.3 6.9 10.9

SSCRXD/TX

SSCTXD/RX

GND

START_SW

[U]C_VIDEO

[V]Y_VIDEO

[Y]_VIDEO

DVD RESET

SPDIF-134

GND

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

GND(M)

P.CON+6V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+12V

DAC_VIDEO_A

AUDIO/VIDEO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

INADJ OUT

0.6 1.8 3.2

(D_GND)

(DVD MT PCB)

ABC D E F GH

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

Q6201

2SK3019_TL

Q6202

2SK3019_TL

D6205

MA111

Q6203

KRA103SRTK

IC6201 PST3229NR

RESET IC

123

Q6204

KRC102SRTK

IC6202

R5F21124FP

SUB MICON IC 1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

171819

2021222324

2526272829

303132

45678

TM101

000-103000530

BT001

MNAAA(R03) BT002

MNAAA(R03)

CD501

P201-2476-2

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

CP6201 A2001WV2-9P

SUB MICON

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

CD6203

E8252002

C6205

1004V V-S

C6213

18P CH

C6215

20P CH

C6212

0.1 B

C6216

0.01 B

C6209

2.2

(1608)

C6218

0.1 B

C6210

0.1 B

C6221

0.1 B

R6203

10K

R6206

4.7K

R6205

33K R6210

4.7K

R6214

4.7K

R6236 4.7K

R6216

4.7K R6217

4.7K

R6215

4.7K

R6219

4.7K

R6213

4.7K

R6204

10K

R6227

100

R6224

4.7K

R6225

4.7K

R6228

4.7K

R6223

100

W807

W863

W865

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

X6201

16MHz

100GT01615

MCU_SCITXD

MCU_SCIRXD

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

RESET_N

AUDIO_MUTE

RESET_N

IIC_OFF

ASEMD0

DVD_RESET

3.3V_POWER_H

KEY_A

KEY_B

AT+5.8V

POWER_FAIL

SYS_POWER_H

D5.0V START_SW

IR_REMO LV_CTL

AT+3.3V

GND

D5.0V

AT+3.3V

STBY-H

AT+3.3V

IR_REMO

STBY-H

D5.0V

FROM/TO REMOCON

(CP7601)

TO AV SWITCH

TO JACK

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

H-10H-9

FROM/TO FLASH

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

MICON SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

3.33.3

AT+3.3V

RESET

NCNC

SYS_POWER_H

RESET

XOUT

XIN

VCC

VREF

CNVSS IVCC

AVSS

EEPROM_SDA

EEPROM_SCL

KEY_B

VSS

MODE

EXT_MUTE

03.1 0 2.8 3.3

3.3

DVD_POWER

DTV_RESET

3.3V_POWER_H

STBY-HNC

DVD_RESET

AUDIO_MUTE DISC_IN_DET9

KEY_A25

ASEMD015

MAIN_MICON_TXD

REMOCON_IN8

1 MAIN_MICON_RXD

3.3

3.3 3.3

3.3

3.3 3.3 3.3

3.3

003.33.33.32.83.3

3.3

2.5

3.3

ACCESSORY

DVD_SCL

DVD_SDA

DVD_CS

MODE

VCC

MODE

RESET

GND

CNVSS

NC NC

GND

OUT

3.3 3.3

REMOCON IN

POWER ON LED

STANDBY LED

AT+3.3V

GND

ABC D E F GH

AA8

J21

J20

J19

J18

IC2801 R8J66954BGSCALER IC

AA3

AA4

AA6

IC2805

M24256-BWMN6TP

EEP ROM

1234

5678

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

C2968

0.1 B

C2965

0.1 B

C2949

0.1 B

C2950

220P CH

C2951

220P CH

C2944 0.1 B

C2935 0.1 B

C2936 0.1 B

C2947 0.1 B

C2942 0.1 B

C2933 0.1 B

C2943 0.1 B

C2940 0.1 B

C2941 0.1 B

C2929

0.1 B

C2957 0.1 B

C2927 0.1 B

C2926 0.1 B

C2925 0.1 B

C2959

0.1 B

C2937 0.1 B

C2939 0.1 B

C2938 0.1 B

C2946 0.1 B

C2931 0.1 B

C2932 0.1 B

C2934 0.1 B

C2945 0.1 B

C2948

2210V V-S

R2874

4.7K

R2846

4.7K

R2839

4.7K R2840

10K

R2838

4.7K

R2856

10K

R2837

R2900

10K

R2801

4.7K

R2850

4.7K

R2841

10K

R2852

R2851

R2842

10K

R2872 100K

R2873 100K

W855

W854

W881

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

AV3/AV4_Y SW_Y_IN

AV1_CVBS TU_CVBS

AV3/AV4_PB AV1_CVBS

AV3/AV4_PR

SPDIF

AV3/AV4_Y

TU_CVBS SW_C_IN

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA LOUT_FI

ROUT_FI

DVD-H

AD_A3.3V AV3/AV4_PB

DVD-H

ASW0

ASW2

DVD-H

ROUT

LOUT IIC_OFF

SW_Y_IN AV3/AV4_PR I2C_CLK

SW_C_IN I2C_DATA

MCLK

SDOUT

LRCK MCU_SCIRXD

BCLK AD_A3.3V MCU_SCITXD

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

I2C_DATA S1_DET

TWIRE_RXDC

TWIRE_TXDC

LIGHT_CTL

LCD-H

GND

D3.3V

AT+3.3V

ASW0

ASW2 ASW2

LIGHT_CTL

BL_PWM

LCD-H

TWIRE_RXDC

TWIRE_TXDC

MCU_SCIRXD

MCU_SCITXD

IIC_OFF

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

S1_DET

SPDIF

SDOUT

DVD-H

ROUT

LOUT

MCLK

LRCK

BCLK

FROM SCALER POWER

TO AV SWITCH

TO JACK

H-12H-11

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FROM/TO MICON

FROM/TO FLASH

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

FROM/TO TUNER

FROM/TO JACK

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

SCLK0(GPIO)

SRXD0(GPIO)

STXD0(GPIO)

QBLCB(GPIO)

QBLCC(RXD0)

QBLCA

PCVIN

SSIN1

SSIN2

VIN3A

VIN1A

VIN2A

VRPA

VIN6A

VRPB

VREFB

VIN3B

VREFC

VRMB

VIN4B

VRMC

VIN3C

LPF

VRMA

VIN5A

VIN2B

VIN4A

VREFA

VRPC

VIN2C

RFAGC(GPIO)

SCISCK(GPIO)

DAC_VREF

ROUT

LOUT

SPDIFO

ACLK

ADATAO

LRCKO

BCKO

SANT

SCIRXD

(DIGITAL PCB)

Vss SDA

SCL

Vcc

1.6

0.8

1.1

1.2

1.7

2.0

1.9

1.6

3.3

0.3

0.2

1.6

3.30

3.3

2.0

3.3

3.0

3.3

SICL 3.3

ABC D E F GH

IC5801 AN5832SA-E1V

BTSC DEMODULATOR IC

1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

171819

20212223242526272829

303132

45678 9

TU5801 ENG36E18KRF

22 23

24 25

AA9

AA2

AA7

AA5

IC2801 R8J66954BG

SCALER IC

AA1

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

Q5801

2SK3019_TL

BUFFER

Q5802

2SK3019_TL

BUFFER

L5801

22uHNLV25

L5805

0.22uHLQW18AN

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

D5803

MA111

D5804

MA111

C5817

0.001 B

C5814

33P CH

C5812

22P CH

C5811

22P CH

C5805

50V(2125)

C5809

0.1 B

C5804

0.1 B

C5845

0.01 B

C5844

0.01 B

C5846

56P CH

C5806

0.1 B

C5822

47P CH

C5821

47P CH

C5841 10 C

C5840 0.33 B

C5839 3.3 B

C5838 0.1 B

C5837 0.022 B

C5835 0.1 B

C5834 0.033 B

C5833 2.2 B

C5818

0.22 B

C5825 4.7 B

C5826 2.2 B

C5827 2.2 B

C5830 2.2 B

C5823 0.33 B

C5847

0.1 B

C5824

0.1 B

C5853

0.1 B

C5855

0.1 B

C5852

0.1 B

C5803

2206.3V V-S

C5801

2206.3V V-S

C5819

2206.3V V-S

R5808

4.7K

R5809

4.7K

R5819

100

R5820

100

R5801

150K

R5802

47K

R5803

100

R5804

100

R5807

100K

R5811 180K

R5812 100

R5810 100

R5823

R5821

R5822

R5825

47K

R5813

3.3K

R5824

47K

R5817

3.3K

R5818

3.3K

B5801

FCM1608KF-102T02

B5803

FCM1608KF-102T02

B5802

FCM1608KF-102T02

B5804

FCM1608KF-151T06

W878

W858

W846

W804

W802

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

TU_CVBS

IF_OUT_1

IF_OUT_2

IF_AGC

GND

D5.0V

TUNER+30V

D3.3V

TU_AFT

I2C0C

I2C0D

SIF_OUT

I2C_DATA

I2C_CLK

TU_AUDIO_R

TU_AUDIO_L

TO AV SWITCH

H-14H-13

CEH420

PCBDH0

3.3 5.0

5.0

3.3

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

(DIGITAL PCB)

TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

NC(BB)

SDA

SCL

+5V

+30V

V_OUT

SIF-out

AGC

IF_OUT

IF_AGC

IF_O

IF_OUT2

IF_OUT1

AFT

+5V

1.0

5.0

30.0

5.0

2.5

5.0

1.0

0.6

1.4

L-R RBF

LOUT

ROUT SPE DELAGC DET SPE FILSCL/STID

GND

SDA/SAPID

STEREO REF

SIF REF

INPUT

VCC L+R REFPLL

PILOT DET

IIC/PARA

AGC SW

MODE

FOMO

MUTE

SIF/BB

NOISE DET

SAP DET

WB TIME

WB DET

SPE TIME

3.5

2.2

2.4

0.5

2.9

0.5

5.0

2.9

2.8

2.2

5.0

3.3

5.0

1.7

2.2

1.3

NC NC

ADIN1

SIDA0

SICL0

IF_AGC

ADVREF0

ADVREF1

ADVREF2

ADIN0 VSB_ADC

TUNER_IF

MCUADIN0 MCU_ADC

IIC0

1.6

1.4

0.6

1.6

0.8

1.0

3.3

2.4

ABC D E F GH

NR3602

4D02WGJ0472TCE

NR3601

4D02WGJ0472TCE

IC2801 R8J66954BGSCALER IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

R3630

4.7K

R3631

4.7K

R3629

470

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

D3.3V

GND

H-16H-15

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

3.3

RX1P

EXT_RES

HDMI_SDA10

PWR0

HDMI_SCL10

HDMI_XIN

PLL_XFC_X

PLL_XFC_P

PLL_XFC_A

HDMI_XOUTNC

3.3

3.3 RX2N

RX2P

RX0N

RX0P

RXCN

RXCP

RX1N

ABC D E F GH

CD2804

CHRU1803

LVDS

LCD PANEL

V2801

M156B1-L02

CP2804

A2006WV0-2X15P

NR2811

CRA108220JV

NR2810

CRA108220JV

A17

D14

E13

A18

IC2801 R8J66954BGSCALER IC

C15

E14

D15

B17

E18

F17

E17

F18

H17

J17

D17

D18

A19

B19

H18

H19

A20

A21

B21

B20

D20

D21

C21

C20

D19

C19

H20

H21

G21

G20

G19

F20

F21

E19

F19

E20

E21

G18

G17

E16

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

C2872

0.1 B C2875

0.1 B

C2868

0.01 B

C2874

0.1 B

C2871

0.1 B

C2880

0.1 B

C2881

0.1 B

C2879

0.1 B

C2869

474V V-S

C2867

474V V-S

C2866

2210V V-S

C2876

2210V V-S

C2974

1016V V-S

C2975

1016V V-S

C2877

474V V-S

C2800

2206.3V V-S

R2835

R2836

5.6K

R2800

22 R2830

B2800

HCB1608KF-181T20

B2806

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2807

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2808

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2809

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2805

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2804

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2803

HCB1608KF-221T20

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

GND

D3.3V

D1.0V

VDD_PANEL

CH0_TXOUT0-

CH0_TXOUT0+

CH0_TXOUT1-

CH0_TXOUT1+

CH0_TXOUT2-

CH0_TXOUT2+

CH0_TXCLKOUT-

CH0_TXCLKOUT+

CH0_TXOUT3-

CH0_TXOUT3+

H-18H-17

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO PANEL

FROM/TO REGULATOR

(DIGITAL PCB)

LVDS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

PLLDVDD_1

PLLAVSS

PLLAVCC_2

PLLAVCC_1

PLLDVSS

PLLDVDD_2

LPFP

VCC33BIAS

VCC33LVDS

VCC10LVDS

VSS10LVDS

VSS33LVDS

VSS33BIAS

REFR

LVDS POWER/REF PLL POWER

LVDS1OUT0M

LVDS1OUT0P

LVDS_CH1

RSDSA

RSDSB

LVDS_CH0

LVDS1OUT1M

LVDS1OUT1P

LVDS1OUT2P

LVDS1OUT2M

LVDS1OUT4M

LVDS1OUT4P

LVDS1OUT3P

LVDS1OUT3M

LVDS1CLKOUTP

LVDS1CLKOUTM

LVDS0OUT4M

LVDS0OUT4P

LVDS0OUT3P

LVDS0OUT3M

LVDS0CLKOUTP

LVDS0OUT2M

LVDS0OUT2P

LVDS0OUT0M

LVDS0OUT0P

LVDS0OUT1M

LVDS0OUT1P

LVDS0CLKOUTM

1.0

3.3

1.4

3.3

1.0

1.6

GND

VDD+5V

GND

RXCLK-

VDD+5V

RX3+

RX2+

RX0+

RX1-

RX3-

RXCLK+

GND

RX0-

RX1+

RX2-

ABC D E F GH

E10

E12

K10

K11

K12

L10

L11

L12

M10

M11

M12

E11

E15

J10

J11

J12

J13

K13

L13

M13

N10

N11

N12

N13

IC2801 R8J66954BG

SCALER IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

C2885

0.1 B

C2884

C2902

0.1 B

C2907

0.1 B

C2908

0.1 B C2911

C2913

C2909

0.1 B

C2920

0.1 B

C2906

0.1 B

C2910

C2912

C2918

0.1 B

C2919

0.1 B

C2922

0.1 B

C2887

0.1 B

C2917

0.1 B

C2903

0.1 B

C2904

0.1 B

C2890

C2898

C2894

0.1 B

C2901

0.1 B

C2896

C2900

0.1 B

C2921

2210V V-S C2923

2210V V-S

C2924

2210V V-S C2905

3304V V-S

C2914

3304V V-S

C2883

2210V V-S

C2882

1004V V-S

C2891

2210V V-S

B2811

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2810

HCB1608KF-221T20

B2815

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2816

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2817

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2820

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2821

HCB1608KF-121T20

B2822

HCB1608KF-121T20

W849

W848

W809

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

AD_A3.3V

D1.0V

D1.8V

GND

D3.3V

TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

H-20H-19

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

SCALER POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

AVDDA

AVDDB

AVDDC

ADVSS

VCC33AD_A

VSS33AD_A

VCC33DA_A

DLLVSS

PLLVSS

DLLVDD

PLLVDD

VDD33

VDD18

VSS33

A3.3V

D3.3V

D1.8V

VSS33ADDA

VDD33ADDA

VDD18

VSS18

VCCQ33

VDD

DVDDABC

DVSSABC

VSS

GND

Core_Power

Io_Power

A3.3V

1.0

3.3

VSS33DA_A

3.3

1.8

ABC D E F GH

IC2804 EN29LV320AB-70TCP

NOR FLASH IC

110111213141516171819 22021222324

25 26 27 28 29

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

56789

CP2803 A2001WV2-11P

CP2801 A2001WV2-7P

NR2802

CRA108100JV

NR2803

CRA108100JV

NR2804

CRA108100JV

NR2801

CRA108100JV

C14

A16

C16

D16

C17

C18

B18

B14

C13

A13

A12

A10

C11

A11

C12

C10

D12

B12

D13

B13

B11

B10

D11

D10

A14

IC2801 R8J66954BGSCALER IC

B16

B15

A15

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

C2808

0.01 B

C2806

0.1 B

C2809

5P CH

C2810

7P CH

C2811

20P CH

C2812

22P CH

C2807

0.1 B

C2802

2210V V-S

R2807 10K

R2809 10K

R2811

10K

R2806

10K

R2802

10K

R2805

10K

R2815

R2814

R2810

10K

R2812

1.8K

R2813

1.8K

W827

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

JG2803

JG2804

JG2805

JG2806

JG2802

JG2801

X2801

27MHz

100GT02728

X2802

25MHz

100GT02509

TCK D3.3V RESET_N

TRST_N

TDO

D3.3V ASEBRKAK_N

PC_TOOL_TX TMS ASEMD0

PC_TOOL_RX TDI

IIC_OFF RESET_N ASEBRKAK_N

I2C_DATA FLASH_WP TDO

I2C_CLK ASEMD0 TDI

GND

TMS

TCK

TRST_N

D3.3V D3.3V_FLASH USB_CS

WE0_N

CS0_N

RD_N

A21

A20

A16 A17 A19

A18

A15 A17

A14 A16

D15 A15

A13 D7 A14

D14

A12 A13

D6 A12

A11 A11

A10 A10

A9 D13 A8

A20 A7

D12 A6

A21 D4 A5

WE0_N A4

RESET_N A2

D11 A1

FLASH_WP D10

D2 INVERTER_H

A19

A18

A8 D9 D15

D1 D14

A7 D8 D13

A6 D0 D12

IIC_OFF D11

A5 RD_N

I2C_DATA D10

I2C_CLK A4 D9

A3 CS0_N D7

A2 D6

A_MUTE A1 D2

ASEMD0

IIC_OFF

RESET_N

PC_TOOL_RX

PC_TOOL_TX

INVERTER_H

D3.3V A_MUTE

GND

H-22H-21

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FROM/TO MICON

FROM/TO JACK

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

(DIGITAL PCB)

FLASH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

IIC_OFF

D_GND

SDA

SCL

PC_TOOL_RX

A16

BYTE#

VSS

DQ15/A-1

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

DQ5

DQ4

VCC

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

VSS

CE#

OE#

DQ11

DQ12

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

A19

A20

WE#

RESET#

A21/NC

WP#/ACC

RY/BY#

A18

A17

NEAR FLASH

D3.3V

PC_TOOL_TX

M32TDI

M32TDO

M32TCK

M32TMS

M32TRST_N

VCNT(GPIO)

XOUT

A10

(GPIO)

D15

D14

D13

D12

D10

D11

WAIT_N(GPIO)

WE0_N

CS0_N

RD_N

A22(GPIO)

A21

A20

A19

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

ASEBRKAK_N

TDO

TDI

TMS

TCK

TRST_N

ASEMD0

RESET_N

MODE1

MODE0

XIN

XIN25

XOUT25

RESET/MODEE10A DEBUGFLASH I/FM32R DEBUG27MHz CLK25MHz CLK

TRST_N

TDI

RESET_N

TMS

TDO

TCK

ASEBRKAK_N

ASEMD0

FLASH_WP

VDD33

GND

3.3

1.2

EEP/PC_TOOL_JIG_CON

ABC D E F GH

NR2805

CRA108270JV

NR2806

CRA108270JV

NR2807

CRA108270JV

NR2808

CRA108270JV

NR2809

CRA108270JV

V18

AA19

V17

V16

T18

W16

Y18

Y17

T20

Y16

U21

U18

AA17

AA20

AA18

U10

Y10

U11

U12

W12

U13

W14

U14

U16

U15

AA21

W17

W18

W19

V20

U17

U19

T17

T19

R17

P17

P19

N17

M17

M19

L17

K17

K20

U20

IC2801 R8J66954BGSCALER IC

W20

W21

Y21

V19

V21

Y20

Y19

W10

W13

K19

N19

P21

V10

V13

K18

N18

AA11

AA14

L21

AA12

AA10

Y12

AA13

V12

Y11

W11

V11

Y13

AA15

Y15

AA16

V14

V15

W15

Y14

M21

K21

N21

L19

M18

L20

L18

M20

P20

N20

R19

P18

R18

T21

R21

R20

IC2802 HYB18TC256160BF-3S

DDR_SDRAM IC

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

C2859

6.3V(2125)

C2851

0.1 B

C2850

0.1 B

C2841 0.1 B

C2842 1 B

C2853 0.1 B

C2846 0.1 B

C2849 1 B

C2855 1 B

C2856 0.1 B

C2857 1 B

C2861 1 B

C2858 0.1 B

C2814 0.1 B

C2816 1 B

C2813 0.1 B

C2815 1 B

C2822

0.1 B

C2821

0.1 B

C2843 0.1 B

C2847 0.1 B

C2848 0.1 B

C2852 0.1 B

C2854 0.1 B

R2829

1K +-1%

R2828

1K +-1%

R2823 27

R2824 27

R2826 5.1

R2825 5.1

R2827

R2819

1K +-1%

R2818

1K +-1%

R2817

160

R2820

160

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DARAS_N

DACKE

DAA0 DAQ0

DAA1 DAQ1 DABA1

DAA2 DAQ2 DAODT

DAA3 DAQ3 DACLK DAA4

DAA4 DAQ4 DAA12

DAA5 DAQ5 DACLK_N

DAA6 DAQ6

DAA7 DAQ7

DAA8 DAQ8

DAA9 DAQ9 DAA8

DAA6

DAA10 DAQ10 DAA0

DAA11 DAQ11 DACS_N

DAA12 DAQ12 DACAS_N

DAQ13

DAQ14 DAA2

DAQ15 DAWE_N

DABA0

DAA10

DAQM0

DACLK DAQM1

DADQS0 DAA1

DADQS0_N DACLK_N DAA9

DADQS1 DACS_N DAA3

DADQS0 DAA7

DADQS1_N DARAS_N DADQS1

DAQM0 DACAS_N

DAQM1 DAODT

DACKE DADQS0_N DAA11

DAWE_N DADQS1_N DAA5

DABA0

DABA1

DAQ3

DAQ1

DAQ4

DAQ5

DAQ0 GND

DAQ2 D1.8V

DAQ7

DAQ6

DAQ12

DAQ8

DAQ14

DAQ10

DAQ13

DAQ11

DAQ15

DAQ9

D1.8V

H-24H-23

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

DDR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

SDCLK

SDCLK_N

SDCKE

SDCS_N

SDRAS_N

SDCAS_N

SDWE_N

SDODT

SDBA0

SDBA1

SDA0

SDA1

SDDM0

SDDM1

SDDM2

SDDM3

SDDQS0

SDDQS1

SDDQS2

SDDQS3

SDDQS0_N

SDDQS1_N

SDDQS2_N

SDA2

SDA3

SDA4

SDA5

SDA6

SDA7

SDA8

SDA9

SDA10

SDA11

SDA12

VCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

SDVREF0

VCCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

VSS

SDVREF1

VCCQ18

VSS

VCCQ18

SDDQ0

SDDQ1

SDDQ2

SDDQ3

SDDQ4

SDDQ5

SDDQ6

SDDQ7

SDDQ8

SDDQ9

SDDQ10

SDDQ11

SDDQ12

SDDQ13

SDDQ14

SDDQ15

SDDQ16

SDDQ17

SDDQ18

SDDQ19

SDDQ20

SDDQ21

SDDQ22

SDDQ23

SDDQ24

SDDQ25

SDDQ26

SDDQ27

SDDQ28

SDDQ29

SDDQ30

SDDQ31

SDDQS3_N

NC NC

1.8

1.6

1.8

0.9

1.8

A10

A11

A12

LDQS

UDQS

LDM

CKE

BA0

BA1

VSS

VSSQ

VSSDL

UDM

NC6

NC5

NC4

NC3

NC2

NC1

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

DQ8

DQ9

DQ10

DQ11

DQ12

DQ13

DQ14

DQ15

RAS

CAS

ODT

VDD

VDDQ

VDDL

VREF

1.8

0.9

1.8

1.6

1.8

ABC D E F GH

Q4301

KTC3875S_Y_RTK

D AUDIO DRIVER

IC6556

TC7PA53FU

DIGITAL AUDIO SW IC

123

456

J4301

RCA-101HT(OR)

COAXIAL

CP4301 TWG-P23P-A1

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

Q3407

KRC102SRTK

MUTE SW

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

D3402

MA111

D3403

MA111

C4306

100P CH

C4304

0.1 B

C4301

0.1 B

C6554

4.7

6.3V(2125)

C4303

0.022 B

C4302

10010V V-S

R6551

100

R4307

220

R4310

100K

R4309

1/10W

R6552

100

R4301

2.2K

R4302

1.5K

R4306

3.3K

R3431

470

B4302

FCM1608CF-600T06

B4301

FCM1608CF-600T06

B6551

HCB1608KF-121T20

W840

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

DVD-H

FILTER_MUTE

DVD_SPDIF DVD_SPDIF

D5.0V

D3.3V

GND

SPDIF

AV1_Y

AV1_C

AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV_A_IN_L

D5.0V YUV_A_IN_R

FILTER_MUTE AV1_CVBS

AV3/AV4_Y

AV3/AV4_PB

A_MUTE AV3/AV4_PR

SPDIF

DVD-H

AUDIO_MUTE LOUT_FI

AV3/AV4_PR ROUT_FI

AV3/AV4_PB

AV3/AV4_Y

A_MUTE

AV1_C

AV1_Y

AUDIO_MUTE

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV_A_IN_R

AV1_CVBS

AV1_A_IN_L

ROUT_FI

AV1_A_IN_R LOUT_FI

FROM MICON

FROM FLASH

TO AV SWITCH

H-26H-25

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

FROM/TO REGULATOR

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO JACK/OUTFROM/TO

JACK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

5.8

LOUT_SOUND

ROUT_SOUND

SWB2

GND

VCC 3.3

3.3

2.9

2.85.0 3.2

ROUT_SOUND

LOUT_SOUND

(CP8101)

SPDIF_OUT

CVBS1

AV1 L IN

AV1 R IN

YUV R IN

YUV L IN

AV1_C

AV1_Y

AV3_V

AV3_U

AV3_Y

LOUT

ROUT

GND

ABC D E F GH

X6551

12.288MHz

100DT01217

IC6551 AK5358A

AUDIO_ADC IC

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2345678

IC6555 MM1501XNRE

C SW IC

123

456

IC6554 MM1501XNRE

Y SW IC

123

456

IC6552 MM1501XNRE

Lch SW IC

123

456

IC6553 MM1501XNRE

Rch SW IC

123

456

NR6551

CRA108470JV

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

IC6557 NJM2534V

Lch SW IC

1234

5678

IC6558 NJM2534V

Rch SW IC

1234

5678

C6574_1

2125

C6584

16V(1608)

C6553

16V(1608)

C6582

16V(1608)

C6578

C6551

16V(1608)

C6562

16V(1608)

C6561

16V(1608)

C6573

C6572

C6563

16V(1608)

C6570

16V(1608)

C6565

16V(1608)

C6566

16V(1608)

C6571

16V(1608)

C6575

2125

C6576

2125

C6577

2125

C6568

16V(1608)

C6580

16V(1608)

C6579

16V(1608)

C6581

16V(1608)

C6569

C6557 2.2 (1608)B

C6560

0.1 B

C6556

0.1 B

C6564

22016V V-S

C6555

1016V V-S

C6559

1016V V-S

R6502

330

R6590

56K

R6582

56K R6584

56K

R6581

56K

R6562

2.7K

R6561

2.7K

R6559

3.3K

R6558

3.3K

R6569

100

R6585

10K

R6583

10K

R6501

330

B6553

FCM1608KF-102T02

B6552

FCM1608KF-102T02

B6554

FCM1608CF-600T06

B6556

HCB1608KF-181T20

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

SW+12V

DVD-H

AV1_A_IN_L

SW_L ASW2

AUDIO_L YUV_A_IN_L

DVD_L ASW0

AUDIO_R LRCK

SDOUT

BCLK

MCLK

TU_AUDIO_L ASW0

SW_Y_IN

SW_C_IN

ASW2

DVD-H

AV1_A_IN_R

SW_R

YUV_A_IN_R

DVD_R

TU_AUDIO_L

TU_AUDIO_R

SW_Y_IN

AV1_Y

AV1_C

AV1_Y AV1_A_IN_L

AV1_A_IN_R

YUV_A_IN_L

YUV_A_IN_R

DVD_Y

RESET_N

MCLK

SDOUT DVD-H

LRCK

BCLK D5.0V

RESET_N

SW_C_IN

AV1_C

DVD_Y

DVD_C DVD_C

DVD_L

DVD_R

SW+12V

GND

D3.3V

D5.0V

FROM TUNER

FROM JACK

FROM MICON

H-28H-27

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO REGULATOR

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

AV SWITCH SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

0/3.3

BAIAS

BUFFER

BAIAS

BUFFER

OUT VCC

VCC H

BUFFER

L4.5

4.5

4.5 0

5.0

0/3.3

6.6

3.3

6.5

3.36.5

12.0

6.5

3.3

6.6

3.3

6.5

12.0

6.5

AINR

AINL

CKS1

VCOM

AGND

DGND SDTO

LRCK

2.5

3.3

3.8

5.0

3.3

CKS2

DIF

PDN

SCLK

MCLK

CKS0 0

3.3

1.2

3.3

VCC H

BUFFER

L4.5

4.5

4.5 0

5.0

4.5

VCC H

BUFFER

4.5

VCC H

BUFFER

4.5

14 12.0

3.3

4.5

3.3

12.0

ABC D E F GH

IC3007 BD7820FP

5.0V REGULATOR IC

12 456

IC3003

PQ035ZN1HZPH

1.8V_REGULATOR IC

12 456

L3001

22uH

TSL0808

L3002

5.2uHCDRH104R

L3005

22uH

TSL0808

L3004

22uHCDRH104R

L3003

22uH

TSL0808

CP3001

A2006WV0-2x10P

Q3009

TPC6108

LCD+B_SW

123

456

Q3011 TPC6108

DC DC FET

123

456

Q3010

RTQ035P02

MOTOR+6V_SW

123

456

CD3002

E82O1101

TO DVD PCB

IC3001 BD9130NV

VDD CORE 1.05V IC

1234

5678

IC3002 AL1015

VDD CORE 1.8V IC

1234

5678

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

Q3002

KRA101SRTK

IC3009

S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

3.3V REGULATOR IC

Q3005

KRC102SRTK

LCD+B_SW

Q3001

KRC102SRTK

Q3004

KRC103SRTK

Q3008

KRC102SRTK

Q3003

KRC103SRTK

Q3006

KRC101S-RTK

LCD+B_SW

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q3007

KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

CP3002

A2006WV0-2X12P

C3022

824V CD

C3043

2206.3V V-S

C3013

686.3V CD

D3007

EC11FS4

D3005

EC11FS4

D3006

EC31QS04

D3004

EC31QS04

C3066 10P CH

C3065 10P CH

C3016

680P CH

C3056

C3054

4.7 B

C3015

0.1 B

C3024

10V(2125)

C3026

10V(2125)

C3027

10V(2125)

C3029

6.3V(2125)

C3031

6.3V(2125)

C3039

2125

C3038

C3014

0.1 B

C3019

0.1 B

C3021 0.001 B

C3018 2.2 B

C3023 2.2 B

C3055

4.7 B

C3004

C3011

0.1 B

C3040 0.33 B

C3012 0.1 B

C3006

0.033 B

C3047 474V V-S

C3049

3306.3V TZV

C3048

3304V V-S

R3013 3.3K

R3044

10K

R3008

10K

R3009

4.7K +-1%

R3016

1.8K +-1%

R3018

150 +-1%

R3002

6.8K

R3010

8.2K

R3032

3.9K

+-1%

R3034

220

+-1%

R3033

470

+-1%

R3041

22K

R3045

4.7K

R3005

R3014

3.3K

R3020

0.047 1/4W 2125

R3022

0.047 1/4W 2125

R3023

1K +-1%

R3015

6.8K

+-1%

R3038 75

R3039 75

R3042

4.7K

R3040 8.2K

R3025

220

+-1%

R3024

1.5K

+-1%

R3007

330

R3019 12K

R3012 1K

R3017

150

+-1%

R3035

6.8K

B3003

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3008

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3014

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3004

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3005

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3007

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3023

FCM1608KF-102T02

B3022

FCM1608KF-102T02

B3015

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3006

HCB1608KF-181T20

B3017

HCB1608KF-181T20

W856

W857

W826

W818

W817

W815

W816

W847

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

KEY_B

KEY_A

POWER_FAIL

AT+5.8V

D3.3V

GND

POWER_ON_H LV_CTL

S1_DET D1.0V

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL S1_DET

TUNER+30V AT+3.3V

LIGHT_CTL

D3.3V

TWIRE_TXDC

GND TWIRE_RXDC

LCD-H

GND

VDD_PANEL

AT+12V

FILTER_MUTE TUNER+30V

D3.3V

D5.0V

LCD-H GND

D3.3V

INVERTER_H

GND

AT+5.8V AT+3.3V

AT+5.8V D3.3V

D1.0V

VDD_PANEL

GND

LV_CTL

SYS_POWER_H

3.3V_POWER_H

AT+3.3V

KEY_A

POWER_ON_H KEY_B

POWER_FAIL

DVD_RESET

START_SW

D5.0V AT+5.8V

D5.0V

AT+12V GND

SW+12V AT+5.8V

DVD_SPDIF D3.3V

D1.8V

D1.0V

GND

DVD_RESET

START_SW

TWIRE_TXDC

SW+12V

D3.3V DVD_R

DVD_L

DVD+3.3V DVD_Y

DVD_C

D5.0V

3.3V_POWER_H

MOTOR+6V D3.3V

DVD+3.3V GND

DVD_R

DVD_L

D1.8V

DVD_Y GND

DVD_C

TWIRE_RXDC

D1.8V

D3.3V

D5.0V

SW+12V AT+5.8V DVD_SPDIF

FILTER_MUTE

GND

MOTOR_GND

GND

AT+5.8V POWER_ON_H

D3.3V

SYS_POWER_H

H-30H-29

CEH420

PCBDH0

FROM/TO JACK

FROM/TO DDR

FROM/TO AV SWITCH

FROM/TO SCALER POWER

FROM/TO HDMI

FROM/TO SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO

FROM/TO TUNER

FROM/TO FLASH

FROM/TO LVDS

FROM/TO MICON

FROM/TO AUDIO/VIDEO

REGULATOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(DIGITAL PCB)

5.8

6.06.0

5.8

12.0

(DDR2:typ 1095mA)

ADJ

VCC

ITH

GND

PVCC

PGND

(typ 1.8A)

(1608)

VCC1.0V DC/DC

GND

5.8 3.3

OUTIN

SWGNDNC

NC 0 5.8

0.8

3.3

0.3 0

3.0

3.3

1.0

0DDG

SDD

05.2 5.2

5.8 5.2 5.2

for LCD PANEL

ADJ

OUT

GND

CTL

05.85.8 5.0 0.8

3.3

5.8 5.8

1.2

4.5

1.2

5.8 CS

EXT

GND

V5/PWON

Vref/SS

VIN

5.8

1.2

1.3

3.3

6.2 5.8

3.3

VCC+3.3V DC/DC

for CORE

VB GND

3.0

SPDIF-134

DVD_RESET

V_IN V_OUT V_ADJ

12.0

(CP501)

FROM/TO POWER

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

POWER_ON-H

S_DET

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

FILTER_MUTE

P.CON+32V

M_GND

3.3

4.5

5.8

GDD

SDD

3.3

1.8

1.3

(CP8501,CP8502)

GND

ZERO

START_SW

DVD_STATUS_1

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+6V

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

[V]Y_VIDEO

[U]C_VIDEO

GND

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+A5V

GND(M)

3.0

ABC D E F GH

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

ATTENTION

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

CAUTION

TH501

5D2-08LCS

D504

ENE241D-10A-Q6

D515

FCHS10A08

D523

FCQ10A04

IS THE LIVE CONNECTIONCAUTION:

L501

SS24H-10100

COIL,LINE FILTER

IC505

PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

FEED BACK

R505

33 1/4W

R510 0.22 1W

IC502

KIA431A-AT

REGULATOR

123

D509

UDZSNP33B

D517

MTZJ12B

D526

MTZJ22B

4A 125V

T501 81240018

SMALL

J501

CCT2302-0901C

F501

4A125V

51MS040L

FH502

EYF-52BCY

FH501

EYF-52BCY

L504

10uH

TSL0808

L503

22uH

TSL0808

CD502

E8231001

Q501

STF10NK50Z

SWITCHING

IS NON POLAR ONE.

THE ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR MARKED NP

THE RESISTOR MARKED F IS FUSE RESISTOR.NOTE:

HS501_1

763WSA0068

HS502_1

763WSA0068

SH501

YQ-12

CP501

A2006WV0-2X10P 1

CD3001

E82K1701

TO/USA

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

Q503

KRA103MAT

Q504

KRC103SRTK

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTORCAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

IC501

FA5531P-A2

POWER CONTORL

1234

5678

IC503

LA5797M-TE-L-E

DC-DC CONVERTER

1234

5678

Q505

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

POWER FAIL SW

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

C522

100016V HD

C504

220010V HD

C511

22016V MHE

C512

22016V MHE

C525

100016V HD

D520

MA111

D519

MA111

D522

MA111

D521

MA111

D516

1H3-E

D512

SARS01-V1

D514

RU3AM-EIC

D510

RM11C-EIC

D508

RM11C-EIC

D511

1H3-E

D518

RM11C-EIC

D507

RM11C-EIC

D505

1N4005-EIC

D506

EC11FS2-TE12L

C505

22P CH

C503

330PCH

C501

0.001 B

C521

0.1 B

C545

0.1525V B

C543_1 1 50V(21-25)B

C538

0.1525V B

C539

0.1525V B

C510

0.001250V KX

C507

0.001250V KX

C509

0.1 B

C513

470P2KV R

C526

0.001 B

C514

470P250V KX

C531

125V B

C518

0.022400V PP

C517

330P B

C546

0.1525V B

C508

0.1275V ECQUL

C506

0.22275V ECQUL

C535_1

10016V MHE

C520

4.750V MHE_P

C502 270200V KXW

C516

4750V MHE_P

R517

R543

22K

R515

R502

150

R531

10K

R524

360 +-1%

R525

2.2K +-1%

R523

2.7K +-1%

R503

12M 1W

R533

10K+-1%

R519

10K

R506

33K

R512

100K 1/2W

R508

100K 1/2W

R535

8.2K

R536

220K +-1%

R529

2.2K 1/4W

R521

100 1/4W

R538

10K

R513

82K

R511

33 1/4W

R509

1.2M 1WRCR

R501

22K 1/2W

R504

22K 1/2W

R544 2 1/4W +-1%

R545 2 1/4W

(21-25) +-1%

R546 2 1/4W

(21-25) +-1%

R547 2 1/4W

(21-25) +-1%

R507

100

R518

100 1/4W

R549

1K 1/4W

B501

W4BRH3.5X6X1.0

W835

W808

W828

W807

W840

W810

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

INV+B

POWER_ON_H

INV_GND

INV+B

POWER_ON_H INV_GND

INV_SGND LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

INV_SGND

GND

POWER_ON_H

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

FILTER_MUTE

GND

P.CON+32V

S_DET

AT+12V GND

AT+5.8V

GND

M_GND

POWER_FAIL

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

FILTER_MUTE

AT+12V

M_GND

P.CON+32V

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

S_DET

POWER_ON_H

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

KEY-A

H-32H-31

(CP2201)

4A 125V (F501)

PCB240

CEH421

FROM/TO JACK/OUT

FROM/TO REGULATOR

(CP3001)

NC FILTER_MUTE

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_ON-H

AT+12V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

AT+12V

GND

M_GND

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

P.CON+32V

S_DET

AT+5.8V

FROM/TO JACK OUT

FROM/TO SOUND AMP

FROM/TO BACKLIGHT INVERTER

POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

1.8

169.0

21.0

21.3

12.012.0

REF

11.0 0 2.5

12.0

2.8

12.0

11.0

169.0

12.0

5.8

ZCD

GND

VCC

OUT

5.7

2.8

4.0

5.8

20.0

1.8

169.0

5.8

V_IN

GND

CPOUT

VRET

1.3

12.0

03.0

KEY-B

KEY-A

GND

ABC D E F GH

IC7001 BD9882FV-E2

INVERTER COTROL IC

110

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

3456789

T7001

8135109G

IC7002 LM2902DR

FEED_BACK IC

1011121314

234567

F7001

1206FA5A-T

5A 32V

CD7005 E82E0604

N’UTILISER QUE DES FUSIBLE DE MEME TYPE

:POUR UNE PROTECTION CONTINUE LES RISQUES D’INCEIE

ATTENTION

REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE FUSE

:FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD,

CAUTION

D7010

UDZSNP5.6B

D7011

UDZSNP3.9B

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

DGQ7003

2SK3018T106

FEED BACK

Q7001

KRC103SRTK

POWER ON SW

CAUTION: DIGITAL TRANSISTOR

Q7005 FSS275-TL-E

1234

5678

Q7004 FSS275-TL-E

1234

5678

Q7002

KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

POWER ON SW

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

D7012

MA111

D7006

1SS133

D7003

1SS133

D7018

MA111

D7020

MA111

D7017

MA111

D7023

MA111

D7019

MA111

D7005

1SS133

D7001

1SS133

D7004

1SS133

D7015

1SS133

D7024

MA111

D7014

MA111

D7013

MA111

D7008

1SS133

D7007

1SS133

D7002

1SS133

C7002

0.0047

C7007

0.0047

C7001

0.1 B

C7011

125V B

C7012

0.01 B

C7009

0.1 B

C7003

330P CH

C7004

0.047 B

C7015

2.2 B

C7010

0.1 B

C7013

0.001 B

C7018

0.0022500V B

C7026

25V(32-16)

C7019

0.001 B

C7006

0.047 B

C7017

0.0022500V B

C7020

0.001 B

C7021

0.001 B

C7022

25V(32-16)

C7033

10P6KV SL

C7032

0.01 B

C7031

0.01 B

C7030

10P6KV SL

C7035

0.001 B

C7024

0.001 B

C7008

0.47 B

R7012

220 +-1%

R7018

10K

R7017

10K

R7020

100K

R7003

4.7K

R7008

47K

R7011

100K 1/4W

R7014

15K 1/4W

R7004

R7006

5.6K

R7022

220

R7015

22K

R7016

4.7K

R7005

100

R7002

18K

R7001

2.7K

R7009

47K +-1%

R7025

1K+-1%

R7026

270 +-1%

R7010

33K +-1%

R7039

33 1/4W

R7034

56K

R7042

470K

R7013

82K +-1%

R7056

4.7K

R7032

100K +-1%

R7023

R7007

150K +-1%

R7021

4.7K

R7035

22 1/4W

R7036

22 1/4W

R7038

33 1/4W

R7046

680

R7050

R7045

680

R7049

R7040

470K

R7043

6.8K

R7041

470K

R7019

10K

R7047

4.7K 1/4W

R7044

1.5K

R7048

4.7K

R7024

R7054

470K

R7033

560K 1/4W

R7030

68K +-1%

W809

W819

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

IS_DET1

INV+B VS_DET

INV_SGND

IS_DET2

INV_GND

GND

POWER_ON_H

IS_DET2

LIGHT_CTL

INV_SGND

IS_DET1

INVERTER_H

INV_SGND

IS_DET1

VS_DET

H-34H-33

5A 32V

5A 32V(F7001)

5A 32V(F7001) CAUTION:F7001 IS MANUFACTURED BY SKYGATE CO.,LTD., TYPE 20N.

PCB240

CEH421

FROM/TO POWER

(POWER PCB)

BACKLIGHT INVERTER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

3.1

12.8

DUTY

BRT

SRT

BCT

VS STB

SCP

PGND

FAIL

VCC

COMP

REG

INV GND

2.1

1.5

1.3

1.5

1.7

1.1

0.1

5.1

1.5

3.1

3.7

HIGH VOLTAGE

3.1

12.4

12.6

GND

Vcc

9.1 4.8 2.8 10.3 2.8 4.8 9.1

9.1 4.8 2.8 0 2.8 4.8 9.1

HIGH VOLTAGE

12.4

2.6

12.4

2.6

12.4

12.6

3.1

CN2

CN1

5.9

12.9 12.8

12.2

ABC D E F GH

CD301 E8141801

SPEAKER

SP301

S0308F01

SPEAKER

SP302

S0308F01

IC301 LA42052-E

SOUND AMP IC

110

11 12 1323456789J301

PJ-364H

HEADPHONE JACK

HS301

763WSA0064

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED :SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

C304

10016V MHE_P

C311

47016V MHE_P

C310

47016V MHE_P

C307

2206.3V MHE_P

C309

47016V MHE

C320

0.1 B

C319

0.1 B

C303

C301

C308

4.7 B

C306 470P CH

C305 470P CH

R302

2.2K

R304

2.2K

R306

2.2K

R305

2.2K

R307

2.2K

R310

R311

R309

1K 1/4W

R308

1K 1/4W

W830

W803

W824

W827

W845

W820

W823

W806

W832

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

LOUT

ROUT

FILTER_MUTE

POWER_ON_H

SOUND+B

SOUND_GND

GND

SOUND AMP SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

(POWER PCB)

H-36H-35

PCB240

CEH421

FROM/TO POWER

FROM/TO JACK OUT

W030

Ripple

Filter NCOUT1NCGNDNCOUT2VccP.PSTBIN2GNDIN1

7.4 1.6 1.6 1.6 10.3 14.0 7.4 7.400NCNCNC

SP OUT L

SP OUT R

GND

ABC D E F GH

SW2202

EVQ21505R

CH DOWN/STOP

SW2203

EVQ21505R

POWER

SW2201

EVQ21505R

EJECT

SW2208

EVQ21505R

SW2207

EVQ21505R

CH UP/PLAY

SW2206

EVQ21505R

VOL UP

SW2205

EVQ21505R

VOL DOWN

SW2204

EVQ21505R

INPUT

Vout

B+

GND

OS7601

KSM-2003TC2P

J8103

RCA-228H(3)NI-02

COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN

J8101

DIN-417HA-01

S-VIDEO-IN

12 34

NC H

J8104

RCA-341H(2)NI-06

CVBS_AV_IN

J8102

RCA-341H(NI)-09

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

D7601_1

LTL1BECBEK5

ST-BY/POWER

CP2201

A2001WR2-3P

CP8101

127301123K2

WAS RECEIVED IN GOOD CONDITION AND PICTURE IS NORMAL.

WITH THE DIGITAL TESTER WHEN THE COLOR BROADCAST

NOTE:THE DC VOLTAGE AT EACH PART WAS MEASURED

CP7601

A2001WV2-5P 1

C8103

100P CH

C8110

100P CH

C8105

100P CH

C8102

100P CH

C8111

470P CH

C8107

470P CH C8109

100P CH

C8108

470PCH

C8106

470PCH

C8104

470PCH

C7602

1006.3V KA

R8114 1K

R8113 1K

R8115 100

R8116 1K

R8117 1K

R8104

R8107

75 R8108

R8105

R8103

R2203

15K

R2204

5.6K

R2205

5.6K

R2206

820

R7602 47

R7605 100

R7603_1 220

R7604_1 220

R2201

R2202

820

R8106

R8118

100

R8119

100

R8120

100

R8111 100

R8112 100

R8110 1K 1/4W

W833

W822

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

AV3_Y

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

LOUT

ROUT

S_DET

AV3_V/AV1_C[J]

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

AV3_U/AV1_Y[J]

AV3_Y

AV1_C

AV1_Y/CBVS1[J]

YUV_L_IN

YUV_R_IN

CVBS1

YUV_L_IN

AV1_L_IN

YUV_R_IN

AV1_R_IN

GND

S_DET CVBS1

AV1_L_IN

AV1_R_IN

LOUT

ROUT

JACK OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

H-38H-37

PCB240

CEH421

CEH423

PCBDA0

(CD6203)

FROM/TO MICON

(REMOCON PCB)

(OPERATION PCB)

PCB270

CEH422

(CD502)

FROM/TO POWER

TO SOUND AMP

FROM/TO POWER

(POWER PCB)

(CP4301)

FROM/TO JACK

MAIN_GND

GND

AT+3.3V

POWER ON LED

STANDBY LED

S-DET

KEY_A

KEY_B

GND

REMOCON IN

YUV L IN

YUV R IN

AV1 L IN

AV1 R IN

GND

AV3_V

AV3_U

AV3_Y

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

ROUT

GND

LOUT

CVBS1

ABC D E F GH

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

NOTE:THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST AT THE TIME

H-40H-39

(SW PCB)

BCZ3B05

JCV9B12

M2601

M2602

ESE22MH22

SW2

2H061605

CD2301

DED020

PCB640

SPINDLE MOTOR(+)

SPINDLE MOTOR(-)

FEED MOTOR(-)

GND(SW)

FEED MOTOR(+)

PICK UO INNER LIMIT SWITCH

SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

ABC D E F GH

TU5801

22 23

24 25

OF PRINTING AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE

THE TIMETHIS INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM IS THE LATEST ATNOTE:

CD301

CP7601

CD6203

Vout

B+

GND

OS7601

J8103

COMPONENT_AUDIO_IN

J8101

S-VIDEO-IN

12 34

NC H

J8104

CVBS_AV_IN

J8102

COMPONENT_VIDEO_IN

SPEAKER

SP302

SPEAKER

SP301

J301

HEADPHONE JACK

J501

1 2

CP2201 1

CD502

CP501

CP3001

J4301

COAXIAL

CP8101

CP4301

CP2803

CP2801

CD3002

CD2804

LVDS

CD3001

LCD PANEL

V2801

CP2804

CD501

P201-2476-2

CP6201

SUB MICON

CP8502

CD7005

CP8501

:SINCE THESE PARTS MARKED BY

CAUTIONDESCRIBED IN PARTS LIST ONLY

CRITICAL FOR SAFETY,USE ONES ARE

DANS LA NOMENCLATURE DES PIECES

N’UTILISER QUE CELLS DECRITES

DANGEREUSES AN POINT DE VUE SECURITE

:LES PIECES REPAREES PAR UN ETANT

ATTENTION

CP2301_1

CP3002

CP2303

CP2302

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

HIGH VOLTAGE

HV 2

CN2

CN1

HV 2

SP OUT L

SP OUT R

GND

KEY A

KEY B

GND

CEH422

OPERATION PCB

PCB270

KEY A

KEY B

GND

SW(GND)

LIMIT SW

SLD-

SLD+

SP1+

SP1-

GND(D)

OPEN

LD+

LD-

F DRV

T DRV

T RTN

F RTN

GND

VR(DVD)

VR COM

VR(CD)

GND

VRF(RF_OUT)

SW1(DVD/CD)

VCC

Vref

GND

PD/GND

LD(CD)

LD(DVD)

GND(M)

P.CON+6V

P.CON+A5V

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+12V

GND

DVD_A_OUT_L

SPDIF-134

SSCRXD/TX

SSCTXD/RX

START_SW

[U]C_VIDEO

[V]Y_VIDEO

[Y]_VIDEO

DVD RESET

GND

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_R

SPDIF-134

DVD_RESET

GND

ZERO

START_SW

DVD_STATUS_1

GND

P.CON+3.3V

GND

P.CON+6V

GND

DVD_A_OUT_R

DVD_A_OUT_L

[V]Y_VIDEO

[U]C_VIDEO

GND

P.CON+3.3V

P.CON+12V

P.CON+A5V

GND(M)

+5V

AFT

IF_OUT1

IF_OUT2

IF_O

IF_AGC

IF_OUT

AGC

SIF-out

V_OUT

+30V

+5V

SCL

SDA

NC(BB)

D_GND

IIC_OFF

SCL

SDA

PC_TOOL_RX

PC_TOOL_TX

D3.3V

CNVSS

GND

RESET

MODE

VCC

GND

VDD33

FLASH_WP

ASEMD0

ASEBRKAK_N

TCK

TDO

TMS

RESET_N

TDI

TRST_N

RX0-

RX2-

RX1+

RXCLK+

RX3-

RX3+

RX2+

RXCLK-

GND

RX1-

RX0+

VDD+5V

GND

VDD+5V

GND

FILTER_MUTE

AT+5.8V

GND

POWER_ON-H

AT+12V

GND

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

AT+12V

GND

M_GND

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

P.CON+32V

S_DET

AT+5.8V

YUV L IN

YUV R IN

AV1 L IN

AV1 R IN

GND

AV3_V

AV3_U

AV3_Y

GND

AV1_C

GND

AV1_Y

ROUT

GND

LOUT

CVBS1

POWER_FAIL

KEY-A

KEY-B

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

POWER_ON-H

S_DET

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

GND

AT+5.8V

AT+12V

FILTER_MUTE

P.CON+32V

M_GND

CVBS1

AV1 L IN

AV1 R IN

YUV R IN

YUV L IN

AV1_C

AV1_Y

AV3_V

AV3_U

AV3_Y

LOUT

ROUT

GND

POWER ON LED

STANDBY LED

AT+3.3V

GND

REMOCON IN

AT+3.3V

CEH423

CEH421

DIGITAL PCB

CEH420

PCBDH0

DVD MT PCB

DMG097

PCB130

PCB240

POWER PCB

PCBDA0

REMOCON PCB

COMMAND TRANSMITTER

TM101

STANDBY LED

REMOCON IN

POWER ON LED

H-42H-41

WAVEFORMS

MICON SOUND AMP

20ns 10us 1ms

200mV 100mV 200mV

1 7 15

SCALER VIDEO/AUDIO TUNER

20us 10us 1ms

500mV 0.5V 200mV

2 8 16

FLASH MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

10us 20ns 10ns

0.5V 200mV 500mV

3 9 52

10us 20ns

100

200mV 200mV 500mV

4 10 53

AV SWITCH

20us 2ms 200ns

500mV 100mV 1.0V

5 13 54

MEMORY

100µs

10us 2ms 500mV

100mV 100mV

6 14

The following waveforms were measured at

the point of the corresponding balloon

number in the schemtic diagram.

NOTE:

I-1

WAVEFORMS

AUDIO/VIDEO

200

1.0V

200

1.0V

200mV

10µs

100mV

The following waveforms were measured

at the point of the corresponding balloon

number in the schematic diagram.

NOTE:

I-2

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

J1-1 J1-2

105A

105B

105C

105D

201

105D 203 203

203

204

202

105E

105F

105D

105

205

208

104

104A

104B

PCB270

(OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

208

122

205

208

120

PCBDA0

(REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

208

PCB130

(DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

202 202

118

PCBDH0

(DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

112

101C

101B

101G

101A

101D

208

101F

101E

101

107

208

115

121

208

119

202

103

103A

103B

103C

106

117

208

117

123

208

114

PCB240

(POWER PCB ASS'Y) 206

206

208208

208

208 116

116 208

113

208

124

207

109

209

108

111

207

110

207

102A

102

102B

125

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

133, 134, 135, 136,137,

CD501, TM101

126

J1-3

127

129

131

132

128

130

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

J2-1

Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

NOTE:

Do not replace the parts. Because,

minute adjustments are needed if

this condition is disassembled

further more.

If the repair is needed, replace the

DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

PCB640

(SW PCB ASS'Y)

701

702

607

604

CD2001

603

M2602

606

602

704

703

605

SW2

705 CD2301

703

605

601

608

600

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.

TSB P/N

Reference No.

Description

101 AE009877 7A7080011A FRONT CABI ASS'Y

101A AE009878 708WPD0010 CABINET FRONT

101B AE009879 702WNA0010 SHEET SPEAKER-R

101C AE009880 702WNA0009 SHEET SPEAKER-L

101D AE009881 713WPA0426 GLASS LED

101E AE009882 713WPA0431 GLASS LED-2

101F AE009883 761WPA0533 HOLDER PANEL

101G AE003760 800WQ0A046 FELT SHEET

102 AE009884 7A7020296A BACK CABI ASS'Y

102A AE009885 702WPA1420 CABINET BACK

102B AE009955 800WQ00122 FELT SHEET

103 AE009887 7A7110048A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y

103A AE009888 711WPD0768 PANEL SIDE

103B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD

103C AE008459 800WQ00105 FELT SHEET

104 AE009889 7A7110049A PLATE BUTTON ASS'Y

104A AE009890 711WPD0769 PLATE BUTTON

104B AE009582 735WPAB101 BUTTON FRAME

105 AE009891 7A7040071A STAND ASS'Y

105A AE009892 704WPA0117 STAND

105B AE009893 761WEA0039 FRAME STAND

105C AE009894 761WSB0072 ANGLE STAND

105D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A

105E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP

105F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND

106 AE009895 752WSA0728 SHIELD DIGITAL

107 AE009790 761WSA0679 ANGLE MPEG

108 AE009896 702WPA1421 COVER BACK

109 75006982 706WPAA007 COVER CONNECTOR

110 AE009897 7225490281 SHEET RATING

111 AE009898 7230008445 SHEET JACK

112 AE009899 7235490100 POP LABEL

113 AE009900 724WND0001 SHEET PC-1

114 AE009901 724WND0002 SHEET PC-2

115 AE005122 726000A073 SHEET CAUTION

116 AE009597 744WUA0029 SPRING EARTH-2

117 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3

118 AE009902 752WSA0727 SHIELD JACK

119 AE009816 753WUAA017 SPRING EARTH

120 AE009904 761WPA0532 HOLDER REMOCON

121 AE009905 761WPA0534 COVER DVD

122 AE009906 761WSA0686 ANGLE HINGE

123 AE009907 761WSA0687 ANGLE LCD-L

124 AE009908 761WSA0688 ANGLE LCD-R

125 72782476 800WQ0A100 FELT SHEET

126 AE009909 791WHA0171 LAMIFILM BAG 650*700*0.5MM

127 AE009910 792WHA0759 PACKAGE TOP

128 AE009911 792WHA0760 PACKAGE BOTTOM

129 AE009912 792WHA0766 PACKAGE TOP CENTER

130 AE009913 793WCD1868 GIFT BOX

131 AE009603 794WHA0003 HANDLE

132 AE009604 794WHA0004 HANDLE STOPPER

133 AE009914 J51T0101A INSTRUCTION BOOK(TOSHIBA)

134 AE009609 JB5ND000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION)

135 AE007451 J3N51617A REGISTRATION CARD

136 AE007627 J5S10229A INFORMATION SHEET(RETURN)USA

137 AE009915 J51T0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(SPANISH)

201 72784217 810B140A0U SCREW SEMS(B) 4*10 CH

202 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH

203 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH

204 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH

205 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH

206 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH

207 AE009613 8109230A0S SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 BK

208 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH

209 AE009916 8117540C0S SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*30 BK

K1-1

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 AE009615 A50N01P650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A50N01P650

601 AE008499 92SBB0033A LOADER SUB ASS'Y DLM1D29-31

602 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y

603 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR

604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE

605 AE008500 92P200017A INSULATOR, F

606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R

607 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED

608 BZ710149 800WFAA008 CUSHION C

701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED

702 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH

703 AE003555 816112080U SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2*8 CH

704 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH

705 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH

CD2001 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04

CD2301 AE003558 122H062102 CORD JUMPER 2H062102

M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A

PCB640 AE008503 A5X002C640 SW PCB ASS'Y DED020A

SW2 AE001158 0500101036 PUSH SWITCH ESE22MH22

K2-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

Reference No.

Description

RESISTORS

! R503 75006901 RC31X1126J RC 12M OHM 1W

! R505 AE009485 R63884330J R,FUSE 33 OHM 1/4W

! R506 AE002150 R803R9333J RC 33K OHM 1/16W

! R509 AE009486 RC31X1125J RC 1.2M OHM 1W

! R510 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W

! R512 AD301018 R002T2104J RC 100K OHM 1/2W

! R544 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W

! R545 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W

! R546 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W

! R547 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W

! R3019 AE009917 R808R9123J RC 12K OHM 1/16W

CAPACITORS

! C501 AE001725 CS0PB0413K CC 0.001 UF 50V B

! C502 AE009490 E8E52C271D CE 270 UF 200V

! C503 79091384 CS0PCH4L2J CC 330 PF 50V CH

! C504 AE009918 E83YF1222D CE 2200 UF 10V

! C505 AE001732 CS0PCH4H1J CC 22 PF 50V CH

! C506 BZ110025 P2122B224M CMP 0.22 UF 275V ECQUL

! C507 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V

! C508 BZ110035 P2122B104M CMP 0.1 UF 275V ECQUL

! C510 AD301026 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V

! C513 BZ110176 C03L0R7Q2K CC 470 PF 2KV R

! C514 AE000308 CD39B0MQ2K CC 470 PF 250V

C518 AE009492 P332E4223J CPP 0.022 UF 400V

! C520 AE009919 E7ESU54R7M CE 4.7 UF 50V

! C522 AE009920 E83YF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V

! C525 AE009920 E83YF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V

C7030 AE009700 C234SLB11J CC 10 PF 6KV SL

C7033 AE009700 C234SLB11J CC 10 PF 6KV SL

DIODES

! D504 BZ410031 D6CE24110A DIODE VARISTA ENE241D-10A-Q6

! D505 BZ410085 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC

D506 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L

! D507 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC

! D508 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC

D509 AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP33B TE-17

! D510 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC

! D511 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E

D512 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON SARS01-V1

! D514 BZ410126 D2WXRU3AM0 DIODE SILICON RU3AM-EIC

! D515 AE009803 D28A10A080 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCHS10A08

! D516 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E

D517 AD300070 D97U01201B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ12B T-77

! D518 BZ410062 D2WTRM11C0 DIODE SILICON RM11C-EIC

D519 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D520 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D521 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D522 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

! D523 AE009829 D28A10A040 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCQ10A04

D526 BZ410113 D97U02201B DIODE ZENER MTZJ22B T-77

D2303 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D2304 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D3004 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L

D3005 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L

D3006 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L

D3007 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L

D3402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D3403 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D4002 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D4003 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D4005 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D4008 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D5803 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D5804 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D6205 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7001 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7002 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7003 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7004 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7005 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7006 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7007 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7008 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7010 AE004795 DE7RB5R62B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP5.6B TE-17

D7011 AE009922 DE7RB3R92B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP3.9B TE-17

DIODES

D7012 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7013 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7014 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7015 BZ410006 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77

D7017 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7018 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7019 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7020 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

K3-1

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

Reference No.

Description

DIODES

D7023 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7024 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

D7601 AE009923 0021E91030 LED LTL1BECBEK5

D8510 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

ICS

! IC301 AE008430 I03SP20520 SOUND AMP 5W 2CH LA42052-E

! IC501 AE009499 ICAD055310 LOW STANDBY POWER IC CONTROL FA5531P-A2

! IC502 AD302211 I1KJ9A431A VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE KIA431A-AT

! IC503 AE009500 I03F9797M0 CHARGE POMP CONTROL LA5797M-TE-L-E

! IC505 AE002809 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W)

! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC LA6565VR-TLM-E

IC2801 AE009656 I56M069540 SCALER R8J66954BG

IC2802 AE009502 IGGM061600 DDR2-667 256M CL=5 HYB18TC256160BF-3S

IC2804 AE009924 S51T01PF01 MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 32M BOOT EN29LV320AB-70TCP

IC2805 AE009925 S51T01PE01 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K 12C M24256-BWMN6TP

! IC3001 AE009505 I07F091300 1CH DC-DC CONVERTER BD9130NV

! IC3002 AE008435 I1LF010150 DC-DC CONVERTER CONTROLLER AL1015

! IC3003 AE008916 I0GF95ZN10 VO=0.8-3.5V I=1.5A TAPING PQ035ZN1HZPH

! IC3007 AE008431 I07F078200 VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A BD7820FP-E2

! IC3009 AE009506 I5HJ0170B0 REGULATOR VO=3.3V IO=800MA S-1170B33UC-OTSTFG

IC4001 AE009720 ICQK06966A VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP ZR36966ELCG-D-G

IC4005 AE008324 IF9J0164AG 1M*16*4BANK(64M) 143MHZ SDRAM M12L64164A-7TG

IC4007 AE009926 S51T01PF02 MEMORY DATA NOR FLASH 16M B00T SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

IC5801 AE004647 I01FF58320 USA STEREO AN5832SA-E1V

IC6201 79097849 I9UF032290 RESET IC 2.9V TYPE PST3229NR

IC6202 AE009927 S34L01PM02 MEMORY DATA FLASH MICOM ROM16K 2KX2 RAM1 R5F21124FP

IC6551 AE009511 IC1J053580 A/D CONVERTER AK5358A

IC6552 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE

IC6553 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE

IC6554 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE

IC6555 AD301988 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE

IC6556 AE009928 I55F0A53FU A/V SW 2IN 1OUT TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T)

IC6557 BZ611139 I0QF02534V A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2534V(TE2)

IC6558 BZ611139 I0QF02534V A/V SW 3INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2534V(TE2)

IC7001 AE009512 I07F098820 19WLCD INVERTER IC BD9882FV-E2

IC7002 AE009513 I0CF0902D0 QUAND OPERATIONNAL AMPLIFILE LM2902DR

IC8501 AE009365 I0QF045650 DUAL OPEAMP NJM4565M(TE1)

! IC8502 AE009805 I1YF9117A0 VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

TRANSISTORS

! Q501 72783392 TJXG10NK50 FET STF10NK50Z

Q503 79097796 TPATC03002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103MAT

Q504 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q505 BZ510108 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK

Q2301 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

Q2302 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

Q3001 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK

Q3002 BZ510107 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK

Q3003 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q3004 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

Q3005 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK

Q3006 AE005049 TNAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC101S-RTK

! Q3007 AE008441 TAAA01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y-RTF/P

Q3008 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK

! Q3009 AE008933 TJ5MC61080 FET TPC6108

! Q3010 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR

! Q3011 AE008933 TJ5MC61080 FET TPC6108

Q3407 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK

Q4301 BZ510109 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

Q5801 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL

Q5802 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL

Q6201 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL

Q6202 AE009515 T27T030190 FET 2SK3019_TL

Q6203 BZ510072 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK

Q6204 BZ510071 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK

Q7001 BZ510067 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK

! Q7002 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P

Q7003 BZ510113 T27T030180 FET 2SK3018T106

! Q7004 AE009929 TJ3MSS2750 FET FSS275-TL-E

! Q7005 AE009929 TJ3MSS2750 FET FSS275-TL-E

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

! L501 AE005143 029X000416 COIL,LINE FILTER SS24H-10100

L503 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH

L504 AD301785 02167E100K COIL 10 UH

L3001 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH

L3002 AE009517 0218MG5R2P COIL 5.2 UH

L3003 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH

L3004 AE009518 0218MG220P COIL 22 UH

L3005 BZ310150 02167E220K COIL 22 UH

L5801 72784092 0216SD220J COIL 22 UH

L5805 AE009260 021AS9224J COIL 0.22 UH

L8501 AE008874 0216SD2R2J COIL 2.2 UH

L8502 AE006570 0216SD1R0J COIL 1 UH

! T501 AE009520 0481240018 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81240018

K3-2

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

Reference No.

Description

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

! T7001 AE009521 048135109G TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 8135109G

JACKS

! J301 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H

! J501 AE009523 064Q1A0010 JACK,AC CCT2302-0901C

J4301 AE009524 060R401140 RCA JACK RCA-101HT(OR)

J8101 AE009526 062R750007 PLUG DIN-417HA-01

J8102 AE009527 060R411058 RCA JACK RCA-341H(NI)-09

J8103 AE009528 060R431039 RCA JACK RCA-228H(3)NI-02

J8104 AE009529 060R431040 RCA JACK RCA-341H(2)NI-06

SWITCHES

SW2201 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2202 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2203 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2204 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2205 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2206 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2207 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

SW2208 BZ612010 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PCB130 AE009931 A51T01P130 DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMG097A

PCB240 AE009932 A51T01P240 POWER PCB ASS'Y CEH421A

PCB270 AE009933 A51T01P270 OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEH422A

PCBDA0 AE009934 A51T01PDA0 REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEH423A

PCBDH0 AE009935 A51T01PDH0 DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEH420A

MISCELLANEOUS

B501 BZ310129 024HT03564 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0

B2305 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B2800 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B2803 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2804 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2805 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2806 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2807 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2808 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2809 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2810 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2811 AE009536 024HC52216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-221T20

B2815 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B2816 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B2817 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B2820 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B2821 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B2822 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B3003 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3004 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3005 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3006 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3007 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3008 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3014 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3015 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3017 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B3022 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B3023 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B4001 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4002 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4003 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4005 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4006 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4008 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4010 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4015 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4016 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B4301 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06

B4302 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06

B5801 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B5802 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B5803 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B5804 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06

B6551 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20

B6552 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B6553 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02

B6554 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06

B6556 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20

B8501 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D

B8502 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

B8503 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D

B8504 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

BT001 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)

BT002 AE008217 141U004016 BATTERY,MANGAN MNAAA(R03)

CD301 AE009733 06E8141801 CORD CONNECTOR E8141801

! CD501 AE009538 120Q119905 CORD SET AC P201-2476-2

CD502 AE009936 06E8231001 CORD CONNECTOR E8231001

K3-3

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N

Reference No.

Description

MISCELLANEOUS

CP501 AE009937 069S2K0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X10P

CD2804 AE009938 06CHRU1803 CORD CONNECTOR CHRU1803

CD3001 AE009939 06E82K1701 CORD CONNECTOR E82K1701

CD3002 AE009940 06E82O1101 CORD CONNECTOR E82O1101

CD6203 AE009941 06E8252002 CORD CONNECTOR E8252002

CD7005 AE009942 06E82E0604 CORD CONNECTOR E82E0604

CP2201 AD301795 069S230639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-3P

CP2301 AE008156 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03

CP2302 AE009544 069EV5T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_105_015_800+

CP2303 AE009545 069EV6T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_106_015_800+

CP2801 BZ614485 069S270629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-7P

CP2803 BZ614214 069S2B0629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-11P

CP2804 AE009548 069S2U0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X15P

CP3001 AE009937 069S2K0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X10P

CP3002 AE009944 069S2O0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X12P

CP4301 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1

CP6201 BZ614458 069S290629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-9P

CP7601 AD300752 069S250629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-5P

CP8101 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2

CP8501 AE009553 06GG2E0019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR-14A

CP8502 AD301796 069S280629 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV2-8P

CUS151 BZ710279 800WFAA006 CUSHION A

EL2401 BZ614043 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD

! F501 79101691 081PC04005 FUSE 51MS040L

! F7001 AE004626 083LA05007 FUSE 1206FA5A-T

FH501 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY

FH502 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY

NR2801 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV

NR2802 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV

NR2803 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV

NR2804 AE009554 11074100M7 R,NETWORK CRA108100JV

NR2805 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV

NR2806 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV

NR2807 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV

NR2808 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV

NR2809 AE009555 11074270M7 R,NETWORK CRA108270JV

NR2810 AE009556 11074220M7 R,NETWORK CRA108220JV

NR2811 AE009556 11074220M7 R,NETWORK CRA108220JV

NR3601 AE009945 110P4472M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0472TCE

NR3602 AE009945 110P4472M5 R,NETWORK 4D02WGJ0472TCE

NR6551 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV

OS7601 AE009947 077Q038007 REMOTE RECEIVER KSM-2003TC2P

SH501 AE009776 126D000045 TERMINAL PIN YQ-12

! SP301 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01

! SP302 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01

! TH501 AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR 5D2-08LCS

TM101 AE009560 076D0LT030 TRANSMITTER 000-103000530

! TU5801 AE009623 0164100027 DIGITAL TUNER ENG36E18KRF

! V2801 AE009948 09EV115008 LCD M156B1-L02

X2801 AE009563 100GT02728 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000B030

X2802 AE009564 100GT02509 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C25000H025

X4001 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029

X6201 75006971 100GT01615 CRYSTAL B16000E007

X6551 AE009567 100DT01217 CRYSTAL DS0321SRAB

RESISTOR

RC...............

CARBON RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

CC...............

CERAMIC CAPACITOR

CE...............

ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP...............

POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP.............

POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CPL.............

PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP............

METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL..........

METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP..........

METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

K3-4

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Toshiba 15Lv505 Service Manual 51T 01P COVER.p65

15LV505 15LV505

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation